JP2018153419A - Performance device of game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a performance device capable of executing a diversified performance.SOLUTION: In an upper-side performance device 500, when a second upper-side performance member 581 is moved to a proximity initial position by an upper-side performance part drive motor, or the like, a front of a screen 561a of a sub-display device 561 is covered by a first upper-side performance member 571 and the second upper-side performance member 581 when visually identified from the front. When the second upper-side performance member 581 is moved to a separable position by the upper-side performance part drive motor, or the like, the screen 561a of the sub-display device 561 can be visually identified from the front via a gap between the first upper-side performance member 571 and the second upper-side performance member 581.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to an effect device for a gaming machine used for pachinko gaming machines and the like.

  A pachinko gaming machine, one of the gaming machines, has a back mechanism board with a payout device and various control boards attached to a frame member that holds a gaming board provided with a gaming area for playing with gaming balls. Composed. Then, in the process of dropping the game ball launched to the upper side of the game area by the launching mechanism, a game for winning a prize by various winning devices provided in the game area is performed. In the game area, in addition to various winning devices, a center decoration, an image display device, and various effect devices (see, for example, Patent Document 1) are provided in order to enhance game play.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-104282

  However, such a gaming machine is required to have a variety of surprising effects.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a subject, and it aims at providing the production | presentation apparatus of the game machine which can perform various productions.

  In order to achieve such an object, an effect device for a gaming machine according to the present invention supports an image display device having a screen capable of displaying a predetermined image, and the image display device so that the screen faces forward. A support unit, a first effect member that is supported by the support unit and disposed in front of the screen and capable of transmitting light emitted from the screen; and is supported by the support unit and passes through the first effect member. A second rendering member that is movably disposed along the placement surface on the placement surface parallel to the screen, and that is capable of transmitting light emitted from the screen; Effect member moving means for moving the second effect member along the arrangement surface at a proximity position close to the first effect member and a separation position where the second effect member is separated from the first effect member. And the second member moving means moves the second When the projecting member moves to the close position, when viewed from the front, the front of the screen is covered by the first effect member and the second effect member, and the second effect is moved by the effect member moving means. When the member moves to the separation position, the screen can be visually recognized from the front through the gap between the first effect member and the second effect member.

  According to the present invention, various effects can be performed.

It is a front view which shows the state which removed the glass frame from the pachinko game machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the glass frame from the front. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of an upper stage production device. It is a front view which shows the upper stage production apparatus of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the upper side support part moved to the movable position in the upper stage production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd upper direction production member moved to the movable position in the upper side production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the sub display apparatus rotated to the movable position in the upper stage production apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of an upper stage production device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper base part and the base cover from the front. It is a rear view of the upper side base part of the state which supported the upper side support part in the initial position. It is a rear view of the upper side base part of the state which supported the upper side support part in the movable position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper side support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper side support part from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side support part from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emission part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the support cover part and the cover light emission part from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the subdisplay apparatus from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the subdisplay apparatus from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper stage production member from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st upper stage production member from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side production member from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd upper side production member from the back. It is a front view which shows the lower left side production | presentation apparatus and left upper side production | presentation apparatus of an initial position. It is a front view showing a state where the lower left front side production member swings and displaces to a movable position in the lower left side production device and the upper left production device. It is a front view showing a state where the upper left front side production member has moved to the movable position in the lower left side production device and the upper left side production device. It is a front view showing the state where the lower left back side production member and the upper left back side production member have moved to the movable position in the lower left production device and the upper left production device. It is a perspective view of a lower left side production apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a lower left side production | presentation apparatus. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left back side production member and the lower left back side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left back side direction member and the lower left back side movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side production member and the lower left front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower left front side production member and the lower left front side movable member from back. It is a perspective view of a left upper side production device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a left upper stage production device. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side production | presentation member and the upper left back side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left back side production | presentation member and the upper left back side movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side production member and the upper left front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left front side production member and the upper left front side movable member from back. It is a front view which shows the right side production | presentation apparatus of an initial position. It is a front view showing a state where the lower right front side production member swings and displaces to a movable position in the right side production device. It is a front view showing a state where the lower right back side production member and the upper right back side production member are moved to the movable position in the right side production device. It is a perspective view of a right direction production device. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right side production device. It is the perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right back side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower right back side production | presentation member and the lower right back side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower right back side production | presentation member and the lower right back side movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper right back side production member and the upper right back side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper right back side direction member and the upper right back side movable member from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right front side base part from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower right front side production member and the lower right front side movable member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower right front side production member and the lower right front side movable member from back. It is a front view which shows the lower side production apparatus of an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the effect member in the lower side production apparatus. It is a front view which shows the state which the movable support part moved to the movable position in the lower production | presentation apparatus. It is the front view which shows the state where the 1st and 2nd front side production member moved to the movable position in the lower production device. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st and 2nd back side production | presentation member rotated to the movable position in the lower production | presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a lower side production apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower base part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the lower base part from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st back side movable support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st back side movable support part from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back side movable support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd back side movable support part from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st front side movable support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st front side movable support part from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd front side movable support part from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd front side movable support part from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st and 2nd front side production member from the front, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st and 2nd front side production member from the back. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the symbol table per special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process side main process of a pachinko game machine. 76 is a flowchart showing a control process following FIG. 75 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port monitoring control process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start monitoring control process. 80 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start monitoring processing in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general purpose process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop symbol display process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 85 of the special symbol stop symbol display process. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 87 of a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 87 of a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the error effect content determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a lamp production | presentation interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a lamp request process. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interruption process of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. It is a schematic diagram with which it uses for description of the priority level of each interruption process. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing device control data output processing in FIG. 98. FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing an initialization operation process at power-on, (B) is a flowchart showing an error recovery process at the time of an overstep number error, and (C) is an error recovery process at a position check error. (D) is a flowchart showing an error recovery process when a time monitoring check error occurs. It is a flowchart which shows an initial position return process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 102 of an initial position return process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 103 of an initial position return process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory initialization process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of an operation pulse in case an initial position sensor, an intermediate position sensor, and a movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the counter value of an operation pulse in case an initial position sensor and a movable position sensor are provided. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st example of a setting which sets the error determination value of step number over error. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd example of a setting which sets the error determination value of step number over error. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of an operation | movement table. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of an operation | movement table. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the consumption current value of the drive motor in each production | presentation apparatus, and a regulation current value. It is a table | surface which shows the example of a simultaneous drive pattern. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship of counter values of operation pulses when the effect member reciprocates and only the initial position sensor is provided. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship of counter values of operation pulses when only the initial position sensor is provided when the effect member performs continuous rotational movement.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine PM is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 as a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine PM of this embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game ( The second special symbol game) is realized. In the present embodiment, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be described as the up-down direction, the front-rear direction, and the left-right direction, respectively.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machines]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM has an outer frame 1 that forms a vertical fixed holding frame configured in an outer rectangular frame size, and a rectangular frame size that matches the outer frame 1 and forms an open / close mounting frame. The front frame 2 is mainly configured. The front frame 2 is attached to the front opening of the outer frame 1 so that the front frame 2 can be opened / closed and attached / removed by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b disposed on the left edge of the outer frame 1 and the front frame 2. . The front frame 2 is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided at the right edge.

  On the front side of the front frame 2, as shown in FIG. 2, a rectangular glass frame 5 that matches the upper front area of the front frame 2 opens and closes and opens and closes using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 a and 3 b. Can be assembled as possible. The glass frame 5 is always held in a closed state that covers the front surface of the front frame 2 by using the locking device 4 described above. As shown in FIG. 1, a game board 50 is detachably set and held in a storage frame 2 a provided on the upper side of the front frame 2, and is always passed through a multilayer glass 5 a of a glass frame 5 that is held closed. The game area PA provided on the front side of the player can be viewed. In FIG. 1, detailed description of the game area PA is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, upper and lower ball dishes (upper ball dish 6 a and lower ball dish 6 b) that store game balls are provided on the front side of the lower left side of the glass frame 5. An effect button 10 that is pressed by a player is provided on the front side of the center lower portion of the glass frame 5. On the upper front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp 7 that emits light according to the game development status and a speaker 8 that generates sound effects according to the game development status are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a launch handle 9 that performs a launch operation of a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame 2. In a lower area of the front frame 2 on the rear side of the glass frame 5 (hereinafter referred to as a game assisting board 20), a ball feeding mechanism 21 for feeding game balls stored in the upper ball tray 6a one by one, a ball feeding mechanism A launching mechanism 22 that launches the game ball sent out from 21 toward the game area PA is provided.

  Next, the basic structure on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear surface side of the front frame 2, there is attached a back mechanism board 30 that has a window that communicates with the front and rear in the center and is formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2. Yes. In each part of the back mechanism board 30, a tank member 33 for storing game balls supplied from the game facility side, a hook member 34 for flowing down game balls supplied from the tank member 33, and a game ball flowing down the hook member 34 are provided. A prize ball payout unit 35 to be paid out, a back side passage member 36 and the like for allowing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 35 to flow down to the upper ball tray 6a or the lower ball tray 6b are provided. Further, a game board cover 39 that covers the entire rear side of the game board 100 is attached to the back mechanism board 30.

On the rear side of the gaming board 50, a main control board (main control board unit) 100 for comprehensively controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, an effect control board (effect control board unit) 200 for controlling the overall effects, An image control board (image control board unit) 300 for controlling image display and sound effects according to game development is attached. On the other hand, on the rear side of the back mechanism panel 30,
A payout control board (payout control board unit) 400 that performs control related to the launch and payout of game balls, and a power supply board (power supply board unit) 450 that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. Etc. are attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are in the assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a seal-sealing structure. Respectively. These control boards and the electrical / electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM can be operated.

  The pachinko gaming machine PM is used for a game in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island (installation frame base) of the gaming facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5 and the like are closed and locked, and is placed on the upper ball tray 6a. The game is started by storing the game ball and rotating the launch handle 9. When the launch handle 9 is turned, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 6a are sent to the launch mechanism 22 one by one by the ball feed mechanism 21, and are launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 22. Thereafter, a pachinko game is developed.

[Composition of game board]
Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 50 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 50 according to the present embodiment includes a plate-like base member 51, and an inner rail member 56 and an outer rail member 57 attached to the front side of the base member 51. On the front surface of the member 51, a game area PA in which the left area is surrounded by the inner rail member 56 and the upper and right areas are surrounded by the outer rail member 57 is formed. A launch passage 59 is formed between the inner rail member 56 and the outer rail member 57 from the side where the launch mechanism 22 is provided to the upper portion of the game area PA.

  In the game area PA, in addition to windmills and a large number of game nails, the first special symbol display device 81 in addition to various winning ports such as the first starting port 60, the second starting port 65, the operating gate 70, the big winning port 75, etc. (See FIG. 70), a second special symbol display device 82 (see FIG. 70), a first special symbol reservation lamp 83, a second special diagram reservation lamp 84, a normal symbol display device 85 (see FIG. 70), Various display devices such as a figure holding lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) are provided. A center ornament 90 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and a screen 95a of the effect display device 95 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 90. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 99 through which game balls that have flowed down without entering each winning port are discharged to the back side of the game board 50. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 50 is demonstrated in order.

  The first start port 60 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first start port switch 61 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the first start port 60 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The second start port 65 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second start port switch 66 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the second start opening 65 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second starting port 65 includes an ordinary electric accessory 67 also called a so-called bell type chucker, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 68 (see FIG. 70) for driving the ordinary electric accessory 67 to open and close. Prepare. The ordinary electric accessory 67 is variable between a closed state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start port 65 and an open state where the game ball is easier to enter than this state.

The operation gate 70 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 71 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 70 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to expand the normal electric accessory 67 at the second start port 65.

  The big winning opening 75 has a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened under the game area PA, which is opened when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won or lost in the lottery. The mouth. The special winning opening 75 includes a special winning combination switch 76 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special electric accessory 77 called a so-called attacker device, and for opening and closing the special electric accessory 77. And a large winning opening solenoid 78 (see FIG. 70). The special electric accessory 77 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the grand prize opening 75 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or easily enter the big prize opening 75.

  The first special symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 70) displays the variation and confirmation of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port. The first special symbol display device 81 is not shown in detail in FIG. 4, but is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp. The first special symbol is fixedly displayed by stopping blinking and switching to lighting display.

  The second special symbol display device 82 (see FIG. 70) displays the variation and confirmation of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 4, the second special symbol display device 82 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed by stopping blinking and switching to lighting display.

  The first special figure reservation lamp 83 and the second special figure reservation lamp 84 are each composed of, for example, four LED lamps. Express (up to 4). The number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Indicates the number of authorizations once held. The number of suspended balls in the second special symbol is the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Indicates the number of authorizations once held.

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 85 (see FIG. 70) is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs normal symbol variation display and fixed display. The normal figure holding lamp 86 (see FIG. 70) is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of normal symbol fluctuations held (the number of normal symbol fluctuations not yet executed). In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 85, there is provided a round indicator (not shown) for displaying the number of round games in the special game (number of rounds: the number of times that the special electric accessory 77 is continuously operated). .

The effect display device 95 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that changes and stops in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice image, and includes the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen 95 a of the effect display device 95, a first special symbol is displayed in synchronism with a decorative symbol display unit 96 on which a decorative symbol change display, a notice effect display, and the like are executed, and a first special diagram hold lamp 83. A first special figure hold display unit 97 in which the symbol hold display is executed, and a second special figure hold display unit 98 in which the second special figure hold display is executed in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp 84. Is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 95. The decorative symbol display unit 96 is provided with three rows of display regions (left display region Z1, middle display region Z2, and right display region Z3) as variable symbol display regions on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are stopped and displayed. It has become so. In the special figure hold display sections 97 and 98, in a normal display mode, when an operation holding ball with a special symbol is generated, a holding image with a white circle is displayed, whereas when the operation holding ball is digested, the special figure holding display portion 97, 98 corresponds. The reserved image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the generation order (incoming order) of the special design actuating balls, and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the holding display portions 97 and 98.

  The center decoration 90 is installed around the effect display device 95, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95, and decoration. The center decoration 90 includes a plurality of effect devices (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right effect device 800, and lower effect device) that perform effect operations according to the game development status. 900). Each rendering device includes an electric drive motor (stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, you may use other drive sources, such as a solenoid, for example as a drive source of an effect production apparatus. Further, the center decoration 90 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 91 that emits light according to the game development status. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the drive motors included in each rendering device are collectively referred to as “motor M”. The effect lamps such as the frame lamp 7 and the panel lamp 91 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”. The effect display device 95 and a sub-display device 561 described later are collectively referred to as “image display device DS”. In this embodiment, an LED lamp is used as the effect lamp LP, but other light emitting means other than the LED lamp may be used as long as the lamp effect can be exhibited.

  When a game ball rolling down in the game area PA enters one of the first start port 60, the second start port 65, the operation gate 70, or the big winning port 75, a winning ball corresponding to the type of the winning port Is paid out by the prize ball dispensing unit 35 to the upper ball tray 6a or the lower ball tray 6b. When the game ball enters the first start opening 60 (second start opening 65), the first special symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 81 (second special symbol display device 82). At the same time, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display section 96 of the effect display device 95. The variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped (determined display) after the lapse of the variation time previously determined by lottery.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 75 starts. Is done. The stop pattern of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of three symbols match. In this embodiment, as a special game, a round game is set to 2 times (2 rounds), a 2R special game, a round game is set to 12 times (12 rounds), and a round game is 16 times. 16R special games set to (16 rounds) are provided.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation function (hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation”) of a special symbol may be activated after the special game is ended, regardless of whether the game is shifted to the 2R special game, the 12R special game, or the 16R special game. . When the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a lottery with a special symbol jackpot probability higher than the normal probability state is performed, so that a new special game is generated relatively early.

On the other hand, after the special game is over, a special symbol variation time shortening function (hereinafter also referred to as “shortening time”) is activated in association with the probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than the normal state, and the number of successful lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal state (unit time). Can increase the chance of winning big hits). In this example, the duration of the short time state is set to a period of a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) of the special symbol from the end of the special game. On the other hand, in the case of a variable time shortening function associated with the probability variation function of a special symbol, it is set to a period from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs.

  When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the so-called electric chew support function is activated, and the state shifts to the electric chew support state (the easy entry state). In the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the second starting port 65 is enhanced by the operation of the normal symbol variation time shortening function, the normal symbol probability variation function, and the ordinary electric accessory opening time extension function. It is a state that can be. In this easy-to-enter state, the possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second start port 65 will also increase. The possibility that the number of balls entering will increase. Therefore, the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function increases the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 65 during the period, so that the possession ball is hardly reduced. The game can be continued.

[Configuration of upper production device]
Next, the upper effect device 500 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. The upper effect device 500 is provided on the upper front side of the center decoration 90 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 10, the upper rendering device 500 includes an upper base portion 501, a first upper support portion 521, a second upper support portion 531, a support cover portion 541, a cover light emitting portion 551, The auxiliary display device 561 includes a first upper effect member 571 and a second upper effect member 581.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the upper base portion 501 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. The upper base portion 501 is attached and fixed to the upper front side of the center ornament 90 together with the base cover 504 that covers the rear side of the upper base portion 501. An elongated left guide hole 502 is formed on the left side of the upper base portion 501. A long hole-shaped right guide hole 503 is formed on the right side of the upper base portion 501. The upper part of the left guide hole 502 is formed to extend in a direction inclined obliquely to the right with respect to the vertical, and the lower part of the left guide hole 502 extends in a direction inclined further obliquely to the right with respect to the upper part of the left guide hole 502. Formed. The right guide hole 503 is formed so as to extend substantially parallel to the upper part of the left guide hole 502. The right guide pin 523 of the first upper support portion 521 engages with the right guide hole 503 so as to be slidable. As a result, the upper base portion 501 has a relatively upper initial position (which does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the upper base portion 501 (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions). (Referred to as the upper initial position) and the effect position that is located at the lower left of the upper initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter referred to as the upper movable position in order to distinguish it from other effect positions). In between, the 1st upper side support part 521 is supported so that an up-down movement is possible in the diagonal direction. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 engages with the left guide hole 502 so as to be slidable. A left guide portion 519 for slidably guiding the left edge portion of the second upper support portion 531 coupled to the first upper support portion 521 is formed on the left front side of the upper base portion 501.

An upper support drive motor 505 for moving the first upper support 521 is attached to the front side of the right end of the upper base 501. An upper support drive mechanism 506 that moves the first upper support 521 using the rotational driving force of the upper support drive motor 505 is provided on the right rear side of the upper base 501. The upper support drive mechanism 506 includes a gear mechanism including a swing gear 507 that is rotationally driven by the upper support drive motor 505, and a drive arm 511. A gear engagement pin 508 that engages with the second engagement hole 513 of the drive arm 511 is provided on the side of the swing gear 507. The drive arm 511 is formed in a plate shape that is elongated using a resin material. The base end portion of the drive arm 511 is pivotally connected to the lower right rear side of the upper base portion 501, and the drive arm 511 is attached to the right rear portion of the upper base portion 501 so as to be swingable in the vertical direction. A first engagement hole 512 having a long hole shape is formed at the distal end portion of the drive arm 511 to engage the distal end portion of the right guide pin 523 of the first upper support portion 521 inserted through the right guide hole 503. A second engagement hole 513 having a long hole shape is formed in an intermediate portion of the drive arm 511 so that the gear engagement pin 508 of the swing gear 507 is slidably engaged.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the drive arm 511 swings up and down by the rotation of the swing gear 507, and moves the first upper support 521 up and down diagonally along the right guide hole 503. Move. The second engagement hole 513 is formed so as to extend linearly along the extending direction of the drive arm 511, and the base end portion of the second engagement hole 513 has the first upper support portion 521 at the upper initial position. Is curved so as to be aligned with the movement trajectory of the gear engaging pin 508 when reaching. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first upper support portion 521 from being displaced downward based on the backlash of the gear mechanism including the swing gear 507.

  An upper initial position sensor 516a that detects that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper initial position is attached to the right front side of the upper base portion 501. Below the upper initial position sensor 516a on the right front side of the upper base portion 501, the first upper support portion 521 is an intermediate position between the upper initial position and the upper movable position (hereinafter referred to as the upper position to distinguish from other intermediate positions). An upper intermediate position sensor 516b for detecting movement to an intermediate position is attached. An upper movable position sensor 516c that detects that the first upper support portion 521 has moved to the upper movable position is attached to the right rear side of the upper base portion 501. A sensor detector (not shown) that is detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c is formed on the front side of the intermediate portion of the drive arm 511 when the drive arm 511 moves the first upper support 521 to the upper movable position. .

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first upper support portion 521 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. The first upper support portion 521 is coupled to the second upper support portion 531 so as to cover the rear side of the second upper support portion 531. Accordingly, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are supported so as to be vertically movable with respect to the upper base portion 501 in an oblique direction between the upper initial position and the upper movable position. A right guide pin 523 that engages with the right guide hole 503 of the upper base portion 501 and the first engagement hole 512 of the drive arm 511 is provided on the right rear side of the first upper support portion 521. When the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper initial position on the right rear side of the first upper support portion 521, it is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, and when the first upper support portion 521 moves to the upper intermediate position. A sensor detection unit 524 that is detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is formed. In the upper left portion of the first upper support portion 521, an elongated hole-shaped guide pin insertion hole 525 extending in the left-right direction is formed. The left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted through the guide pin insertion hole 525.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the second upper support portion 531 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. A display device coupling portion 532 coupled to the rotation coupling portion 563 of the sub display device 561 is formed at the center of the second upper support portion 531. In a state where the rotation coupling portion 563 and the display device coupling portion 532 of the secondary display device 561 are coupled, the second upper support portion 531 supports the secondary display device 561 so that the screen 561a faces forward. The sub display device 561 is configured to be rotatable relative to the rotation coupling unit 563. Thereby, in a state where the rotation coupling unit 563 and the display device coupling unit 532 of the sub display device 561 are coupled, the second upper support unit 531 has an initial position where the sub display device 561 extends in the left-right direction (hereinafter, other initial (Referred to as the initial rotation position to distinguish it from the position) and an effect position rotated counterclockwise by 270 degrees (viewed from the front) from the initial rotation position (hereinafter referred to as a rotationally movable position to distinguish from other effect positions) The sub-display device 561 is rotatably supported along a plane including the screen 561a.

A display device driving motor 534 for rotating the sub display device 561 is attached to the front side of the center portion of the second upper support portion 531. A rotation drive mechanism 535 that rotates the sub display device 561 using the rotation drive force of the display device drive motor 534 is provided on the rear side of the center portion of the second upper support portion 531. The rotation drive mechanism 535 is configured using a gear mechanism that is rotationally driven by the display device drive motor 534, and meshes with the rotation gear 564 of the sub display device 561. A rotation initial position sensor 533a for detecting that the sub display device 561 has rotated to the rotation initial position is attached above the display device coupling portion 532 on the front side of the second upper support portion 531. On the left side of the display device coupling portion 532 on the front side of the second upper support portion 531, the sub display device 561 is an intermediate position between the rotation initial position and the rotation movable position (hereinafter, the rotation intermediate position is distinguished from other intermediate positions). A rotation intermediate position sensor 533b for detecting the rotation movement is attached. The intermediate rotation position is set to a position where the sub display device 561 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees (viewed from the front) from the initial rotation position.

  On the left side of the second upper support portion 531, a first effect member engaging portion 536 having a long hole shape is formed in which the rear fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is engaged so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. The rear side fixing portion 576 of the first upper side effect member 571 and the first effect member engaging portion 536 are engaged, and the front side of the rear side fixing portion 576 is covered with a support cover portion 541 (left side portion) described later. In the state, the second upper support part 531 supports the first upper effect member 571. The left guide pin 577 formed in the rear fixing portion 576 of the first upper effect member 571 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521 and slides into the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. Engage in a movable manner. Thus, while the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move up and down between the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position, the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 moves to the right guide hole 503. The first upper effect member 571 moves up and down integrally with the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 in order to slide the upper portion of the left guide hole 502 substantially parallel to the first upper support portion 521. When the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 move to the upper movable position beyond the upper intermediate position, the left guide pin 577 is inclined further to the right than the upper portion of the left guide hole 502. Therefore, the first upper effect member 571 is displaced slightly to the left with respect to the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531.

  A second effect member receiving portion 537 that receives the rear movable portion 586 of the second upper effect member 581 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction is provided on the right side of the second upper support portion 531. In a state where the rear movable portion 586 of the second upper effect member 581 is received by the second effect member receiving portion 537 and the front side of the second effect member receiving portion 537 is covered with a cover light emitting portion 551 described later. The upper support part 531 supports the second upper effect member 581 so as to be vertically movable in an oblique direction while hiding the drive transmission mechanism (the upper effect part drive gear 539 and the like) of the second upper effect member 581. An upper stage production unit drive motor 538 for moving the second upper stage production member 581 is attached to the lower right rear side of the second upper side support unit 531. An upper rendering unit drive gear 539 that moves the second upper rendering member 581 using the rotational driving force of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is attached to the lower right front side of the second upper support unit 531. The upper effect part drive gear 539 meshes with the rack gear part 588 of the second upper effect member 581.

  A support cover part 541 and a cover light emitting part 551 are attached to the front side of the second upper support part 531. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the support cover portion 541 is formed in a plate shape using a translucent resin material, and is disposed between the second upper support portion 531 and the sub display device 561. The front side of the second upper support portion 531 is covered. On the right side of the support cover portion 541, a light transmitting portion 546 that can transmit light from the light emitting element 554 disposed on the lamp substrate 552 of the cover light emitting portion 551 is formed.

A display device insertion hole 542 through which the rotation coupling portion 563 of the sub display device 561 is inserted is formed in the center portion of the support cover portion 541. An initial position sensor insertion hole 543a through which the rotation initial position sensor 533a of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed above the display device insertion hole 542 in the center portion of the support cover portion 541. An intermediate position sensor insertion hole 543b into which the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b of the second upper support portion 531 is inserted is formed on the left side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the center portion of the support cover portion 541. A movable position sensor insertion hole 543c through which the rotational movable position sensor 553c of the cover light emitting unit 551 is inserted is formed on the right side of the display device insertion hole 542 in the center portion of the support cover portion 541. An initial position stopper portion 544 for restricting (clockwise) rotation of the sub display device 561 beyond the rotation initial position is formed in the vicinity of the initial position sensor insertion hole 543a in the center portion of the support cover portion 541. In the vicinity of the movable position sensor insertion hole 543c in the center of the support cover portion 541, a movable position stopper portion 545 that restricts (counterclockwise) rotation of the sub display device 561 beyond the rotational movable position is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the cover light emitting portion 551 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the light transmitting portion 546 formed on the right side of the support cover portion 541. . A lamp substrate 552 is attached to the front portion of the cover light emitting portion 551 so as to face the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552, a plurality of light emitting elements 554 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 are disposed. On the left side of the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 552, a rotationally movable position sensor 553c that detects that the sub display device 561 has been rotationally moved to the rotationally movable position is disposed.

  The cover light emitting unit 551 overlapped and coupled to the rear side of the translucent portion 546 of the support cover portion 541 covers the front side of the second effect member receiving portion 537 that receives the drive transmission mechanism of the second upper effect member 581. It has become. An upper guide pin 556 and a lower guide pin 557 that are slidably engaged with the guide hole 587 of the second upper effect member 581 are formed on the lower rear side of the cover light emitting unit 551. The upper guide pin 556 and the lower guide pin 557 are arranged side by side in a direction inclined obliquely to the left with respect to the vertical. Accordingly, the second effect member receiving portion 537 and the cover light emitting portion 551 of the second upper effect member 581 are changed from the second upper effect member 581 (second light emission effect portion 582) to the first upper effect member 571 (first light emission effect). And the second upper stage production member 581 away from the first upper stage production member 571 in the lower right direction at the initial position close to the right side of the portion 572) (hereinafter referred to as the proximity initial position to be distinguished from other initial positions). The second upper effect member 581 is supported so as to be vertically movable between a position (hereinafter, referred to as a separation movable position in order to distinguish it from other effect positions). A proximity initial position sensor 558a that detects that the second upper effect member 581 has moved to the proximity initial position is attached to the upper rear side of the cover light emitting unit 551. A separation movable position sensor 558c that detects that the second upper effect member 581 has moved to the separation movable position is attached to the lower rear side of the cover light emitting unit 551.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the sub display device 561 has a screen 561a capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the front side. The sub display device 561 displays, as an effect image, an image (for example, an image visually recognized by the player via the first light emission effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 or the second light effect effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581). An image for coloring the first light-emitting effect unit 572 or the second light-emitting effect unit 582) or an image that is directly visible to the player is displayed on the screen 561a. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the sub display device 561. As shown in FIG. 18B, a rotation coupling portion 563 that is coupled to the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support portion 531 is attached to the rear side of the center portion of the sub display device 561. The sub display device 561 is configured to be movable relative to the rotation coupling portion 563 (that is, the display device coupling portion 532 of the second upper support portion 531) together with the rotary gear 564 connected to the rear side of the sub display device 561. Is done. When the secondary display device 561 rotates to the initial rotation position on the upper rear side of the secondary display device 561, it is detected by the rotation initial position sensor 533a, and when the secondary display device 561 rotates to the rotation intermediate position, the rotation intermediate position sensor 533b. When the sub display device 561 rotates to the rotationally movable position, a sensor detection unit 565 that is detected by the rotationally movable position sensor 553c is attached.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first upper effect member 571 is formed in a plate shape bent in a “U” shape when viewed from above using a resin material having translucency, and is provided with a predetermined decoration. The first light emitting effect portion 572, the first effect member engaging portion 536 of the second upper support portion 531 and the rear fixing portion 576 that engages displaceably in the left-right direction. In a state where the rear side fixing portion 576 is engaged with the first effect member engaging portion 536 and supported by the second upper support portion 531, the first light emission effect portion 572 is located on the left front side of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561. It is arranged. That is, the left side portion of the sub display device 561 is disposed between the front portion (first light emitting effect portion 572) and the rear portion (rear side fixing portion 576) of the first upper effect member 571. A left guide pin 577 that protrudes rearward of the rear side fixing portion 576 is formed at the rear portion of the rear side fixing portion 576. As described above, the left guide pin 577 is inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 525 of the first upper support portion 521, and is slidably engaged with the left guide hole 502 of the upper base portion 501. An elongate guide hole 578 extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower left side of the rear fixing portion 576 in the rear portion of the first upper effect member 571. The guide hole portion 578 engages with a guide support portion 547 formed on the left rear side of the support cover portion 541 and is supported so as to be displaceable left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the second upper stage production member 581 is formed in a plate shape bent in a “U” shape when viewed from above using a resin material having translucency, and is provided with a predetermined decoration. The second light emitting effect part 582 and the rear movable part 586 received by the second effect member receiving part 537 of the second upper support part 531 are provided. In a state where the rear movable portion 586 is received by the second effect member receiving portion 537 and supported by the second upper support portion 531 (and the cover light emitting portion 551) so as to be vertically movable, the second light emitting effect portion 582 is sub-displayed. It is arranged at the right front of the screen 561a of the device 561. That is, the right side portion of the sub display device 561 is disposed between the front side portion (second light emission effect portion 582) and the rear side portion (rear side movable portion 586) in the second upper side effect member 581. Note that the second light emitting effect unit 582 is disposed on a surface parallel to the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 that passes through the first light emitting effect unit 572 (hereinafter may be referred to as an arrangement surface).

  When the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position, the first light emission effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light emission effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side, When viewed from the front, the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 cover the front of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561. In this state, when the sub display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the light emitted from the screen 561a is transmitted through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582. In addition, when the first light emitting effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light effect effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side, an integrated decorative shape (for example, a predetermined character) Column).

  An elongate guide hole 587 is formed at the center of the rear movable portion 586. The guide hole 587 is formed to extend in a direction inclined obliquely to the left with respect to the vertical. An upper guide pin 556 and a lower guide pin 557 are engaged with the guide hole 587 so as to be slidable. On the left side of the rear movable portion 586, a rack gear portion 588 is formed that meshes with the upper effect portion drive gear 539 of the second upper support portion 531. When the second upper stage production member 581 moves to the proximity initial position on the left side of the front part of the rear movable part 586, it is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, and when the second upper stage production member 581 moves to the separation movable position, the separation movable position sensor. A sensor detection unit 589 detected by 558c is formed.

In the upper effect device 500 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (during standby), as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are on the upper side. It moves to the initial position, the sub display device 561 rotates to the rotation initial position, and the second upper effect member 581 moves to the proximity initial position. At this time, when the first light emitting effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light effect effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581 are integrated side by side and viewed from the front, the first light emitting effect part The front of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 is covered by the 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. At this time, the integrated first light emitting effect unit 572 and second light emitting effect unit 582, together with the first upper support part 521 and the second upper support part 531, do not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. Located at the top of the ornament 90. In this state, when the sub display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the light emitted from the screen 561a is transmitted through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582. Thereby, the 1st light emission production | generation part 572 and the 2nd light emission production | generation part 582 light-emit so that it may be colored according to the production image displayed on the screen 561a of the subdisplay apparatus 561.

  In a predetermined gaming state (during the production operation), as shown in FIG. 7, the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 are movable upward from the upper initial position to the lower left by the upper support drive motor 505 and the like. Move to position. At this time, the integrated first light-emitting effect unit 572 and second light-emitting effect unit 582 move to the lower left together with the first upper support unit 521 and the second upper support unit 531, and the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. Overlapping. At this time, since the left guide pin 577 of the first upper effect member 571 slides from the upper part to the lower part of the left guide hole 502 in the upper base part 501, the first upper effect member 571 has the first upper support part 521 and the first upper support part 521. 2 Displaces slightly to the left with respect to the upper support 531. Therefore, a gap is generated between the first light emitting effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 and the second light effect effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581. Moreover, when the 1st upper direction production member 571 displaces to the left, when the sub-display apparatus 561 rotates, it is prevented from contacting the 1st upper side production member 571. Note that the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 (the integrated first light emission effect portion 572 and second light emission effect portion 582) are arranged at the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position by the upper support portion drive motor 505 and the like. It is also possible to perform an effect operation that reciprocally moves back and forth (or in the vicinity of the upper intermediate position).

  With the first upper support portion 521 and the second upper support portion 531 moved to the upper movable position, the second upper effect member 581 is moved from the proximity initial position to the lower right separation movable position by the upper effect portion drive motor 538 or the like. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the second light emitting effect part 582 of the second upper effect member 581 is separated from the first light effect effect part 572 of the first upper effect member 571 to the lower right, and the first light effect effect is produced. A part of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 is visible from the front through the gap between the part 572 and the second light emitting effect part 582. Further, the second upper rendering member 581 moves to the lower right, thereby preventing the second display device 561 from coming into contact with the second upper rendering member 581 when rotating.

  With the second upper effect member 581 moved to the separation movable position, the sub display device 561 is rotated from the rotation initial position to the rotation movable position (or rotation intermediate position) by the display device drive motor 534 or the like. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9, the screen 561 a of the sub display device 561 extends in the up and down direction, and the sub display device is viewed from the front through the gap between the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582. It becomes a state where almost the entire screen 561a of 561 is visible. In this state, when the sub display device 561 displays the effect image on the screen 561a, the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 (without passing through the first light emission effect unit 572 or the second light emission effect unit 582). ) Will be directly visible. At this time, the translucent part 546 of the support cover part 541 can be visually recognized from the front, so that it is possible to display an effect image in accordance with the light emission effect of the translucent part 546. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform various unexpected effects. For example, an effect image integrated with an image displayed on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 is displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 as the effect image. In addition, during the game standby demonstration or during execution of a predetermined effect, an effect image independent of the image displayed on the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 may be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561. In addition, during the game standby demonstration or during execution of a predetermined effect, an effect image for coloring the first light emission effect unit 572 and the second light emission effect unit 582 may be displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561.

[Configuration of lower left side production device and upper left side production device]
Next, the lower left rendering device 600 and the upper left rendering device 700 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower left side production device 600 is provided on the lower left side of the center ornament 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. FIG. 6 is a view of the game board 50 with the base member 51 removed. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the lower left side production device 600 includes a lower left back side base portion 601, a lower left back side movable member 611, a lower left back side production member 621, a lower left front side base portion 631, and a lower left front side movable member 651. And a lower left front side production member 661.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the lower left back base portion 601 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. An elongate guide hole 602 is formed in the middle part of the lower left back side base part 601. The guide hole 602 is formed so as to extend obliquely to the upper right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 616 of the lower left back side movable member 611 is engaged with the guide hole 602 so as to be slidable. As a result, the lower left back side base portion 601 is relatively left between the lower left back side base portion 601 and the lower left front side base portion 631 (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). In order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it is referred to as the lower left back side initial position) and an effect position (hereinafter referred to as another effect position) that is located at the upper right of the lower left back side initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. The lower left back side movable member 611 is supported so as to be movable to the left and right.

  A left lower back side drive motor 603 for moving the left lower back side movable member 611 is attached to the front side of the lower end portion of the lower left back side base portion 601. A lower left back drive gear 604 that moves the lower left back side movable member 611 using the rotational driving force of the lower left back drive motor 603 is provided on the lower front side of the lower left back base portion 601. The lower left rear drive gear 604 is configured to mesh with the rack gear portion 617 of the lower left rear movable member 611. A left lower back side initial position sensor 605a for detecting that the left lower back side movable member 611 has moved to the left lower back side initial position is attached to the left side of the front middle portion of the lower left back side base part 601. A left lower back side movable position sensor 605c that detects that the left lower back side movable member 611 has moved to the left lower back side movable position is provided on the right side of the front middle portion of the lower left back side base 601. On the upper front side of the lower left back side base portion 601, an upper guide portion 606 for guiding the rear upper edge portion of the lower left back side movable member 611 so as to be slidable is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the left lower back side movable member 611 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The lower left back side movable member 611 is combined with the lower left back side effect member 621 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left back side effect member 621. As a result, the left lower back side production member 621 and the left lower back side movable member 611 are supported so as to be movable left and right between the left lower back side initial position and the left lower back side movable position with respect to the left lower back side base portion 601. A lamp substrate 612 is attached to the front portion of the lower left back side movable member 611 so as to face the light transmitting portion 623 of the lower left back side effect member 621. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 612, a plurality of light emitting elements 613 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 623 of the lower left rear side effect member 621 are disposed. A plate-like slide guide portion 616 that engages with the guide hole 602 of the lower left back side base portion 601 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower left back side movable member 611. A rack gear portion 617 that meshes with the lower left rear side drive gear 604 of the lower left rear side base portion 601 is formed at the lower edge portion of the lower left rear side movable member 611. When the lower left back side movable member 611 moves to the lower left back side initial position on the middle rear side of the lower left back side movable member 611, it is detected by the lower left back side initial position sensor 605a, and when the lower left back side movable member 611 moves to the lower left back side movable position, the lower left lower side side A sensor detection unit 618 detected by the movable position sensor 605c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower left rear side effect member 621 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A plurality of translucent portions 623 arranged in the vertical direction are formed on the front side of the lower left rear side production member 621 provided with a predetermined decoration. The translucent portion 623 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 613 disposed on the lamp substrate 612 of the lower left back side movable member 611 and to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the lower left front base portion 631 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The lower left front base portion 631 is formed by using an upper boss portion 632a formed on the upper rear side of the lower left front base portion 631 and a lower boss portion 632b formed on the lower rear side. 601 is coupled to the front. As a result, the lower left back side effect member 621 and the lower left back side movable member 611 are arranged in the gap between the lower left front side base portion 631 and the lower left back side base portion 601.

  A tilt support portion 634 that rotatably supports the tilt support member 641 connected to the lower left front side movable member 651 is formed at the center of the lower left front side base portion 631. An elongate guide hole 635 is formed on the upper side of the lower left front base portion 631. The guide hole 635 is formed to extend in a curved arc shape so that the upper side is convex. The guide pin 657 of the lower left front movable member 651 engages with the guide hole 635 so as to be slidable. Accordingly, the lower left front base portion 631 is distinguished from other initial positions in the vertical direction (which does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the lower left front base portion 631 (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions). The left-side standing initial position) and an effect position that tilts rightward from the left-side standing initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter, tilted to the left to distinguish it from other effect positions) The lower left front movable member 651 is supported so as to be swingable and displaceable.

  A left standing initial position sensor 636a for detecting that the left lower facing movable member 651 is displaced to the left standing initial position is attached to the upper left of the tilt support portion 634 on the rear side of the lower left front base portion 631. A left-side tilt movable position sensor 636c that detects that the left-bottom front-side movable member 651 is displaced to the left-side tilt movable position is attached to a position directly above the tilt support portion 634 on the rear side of the lower-left front-side base portion 631. A lower left front drive motor 637 for moving the lower left front movable member 651 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower left front base portion 631. A lower left front drive mechanism 638 that swings and displaces the lower left front movable member 651 using the rotational driving force of the lower left front drive motor 637 is provided on the lower rear side of the lower left front base 631.

  The lower left front drive mechanism 638 includes a gear mechanism 639 that is rotationally driven by the lower left front drive motor 637 and a tilt support member 641. The tilt support member 641 is formed in a disk shape using a resin material, and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 634 of the lower left front base portion 631. The front portion of the tilting support member 641 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 656 of the lower left front side movable member 651. An elongated hole-shaped engagement hole 642 that protrudes to the side (downward) of the tilt support member 641 is formed on the side of the tilt support member 641. An engagement pin 639a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 639 engages with the engagement hole 642 so as to be slidable. As a result, the tilt support member 641 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 639, and swings and displaces the lower left front movable member 651 connected to the tilt support member 641. When the tilt support member 641 swings and displaces the lower left front movable member 651 to the left standing initial position on the side of the tilt support member 641, it is detected by the left standing initial position sensor 636a, and the tilt support member 641 is movable to the lower left front side. When the member 651 is oscillated and displaced to the left tilt movable position, a sensor detection unit 643 that is detected by the left tilt movable position sensor 636c is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the lower left front side movable member 651 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The lower left front side movable member 651 is coupled to the lower left front side effect member 661 so as to cover the rear side of the lower left front side effect member 661. Accordingly, the lower left front side production member 661 and the lower left front side movable member 651 are supported so as to be swingable and displaceable between the left standing initial position and the left side tilt movable position with respect to the lower left front side base portion 631. A lamp substrate 652 is attached to the front part of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to face the light transmitting part 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661. A plurality of light emitting elements 653 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 663 of the lower left front side effect member 661 are disposed on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 652. A connecting shaft portion 656 that is connected to the tilt support member 641 of the lower left front side base portion 631 is formed on the lower rear side of the lower left front side movable member 651. A guide pin 657 that engages with the guide hole 635 of the lower left front base portion 631 is formed on the rear side of the middle portion of the lower left front movable member 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the lower left front side production member 661 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A translucent portion 663 having a character shape is formed on the front side of the lower left front side production member 661 provided with a predetermined decoration. The translucent portion 663 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 653 disposed on the lamp substrate 652 of the lower left front side movable member 651 so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the upper left rendering device 700 is provided on the upper left side of the center ornament 90 on the rear side of the base member 51, and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. That is, the upper left rendering device 700 is arranged side by side above the lower left rendering device 600. As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the left upper stage production device 700 includes an upper left rear side base part 701, an upper left rear side movable member 711, an upper left rear side production member 721, an upper left front side base part 731 and an upper left front side movable member 751. And an upper left front side production member 761.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the upper left back base portion 701 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically using a resin material. A long hole-shaped guide hole 702 is formed in the upper part of the upper left back side base part 701. The guide hole 702 is formed so as to extend while being inclined downward to the right with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 716 of the upper left back side movable member 711 engages with the guide hole 702 so as to be slidable. As a result, the upper left back side base portion 701 is positioned between the upper left back side base portion 701 and the upper left front side base portion 731 (which does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). In order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it is referred to as an upper left back side initial position) and an effect position (hereinafter referred to as another effect position) that is located at the lower right of the upper left back side initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. The upper left rear side movable member 711 is supported so as to be movable to the left and right.

  An upper left back side drive motor 703 for moving the upper left back side movable member 711 is attached to the front side of the upper left portion of the upper left back side base portion 701. An upper left rear drive gear (not shown) that moves the upper left rear movable member 711 using the rotational driving force of the upper left rear drive motor 703 is provided on the upper front side of the upper left back base portion 701. The upper left rear side drive gear meshes with the rack gear portion 717 of the upper left rear side movable member 711. An upper left rear side initial position sensor 705a for detecting that the upper left rear side movable member 711 has moved to the upper left rear side initial position is attached to the left side of the front middle part of the upper left rear side base part 701. An upper left rear side movable position sensor 705c that detects that the upper left rear side movable member 711 has moved to the upper left rear side movable position is attached to the right side of the front middle portion of the upper left rear side base portion 701. A lower guide portion 706 that guides the rear lower edge portion of the upper left back side movable member 711 so as to be slidable is formed on the lower front side of the upper left back side base portion 701.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left back side movable member 711 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The upper left back side movable member 711 is combined with the upper left back side effect member 721 so as to cover the rear side of the upper left back side effect member 721. Thereby, the upper left rear side production member 721 and the upper left rear side movable member 711 are supported so as to be movable left and right between the upper left rear side initial position and the upper left rear side movable position with respect to the upper left rear side base portion 701. A lamp substrate 712 is attached to the front part of the upper left rear side movable member 711 so as to face the light transmitting part 723 of the upper left rear side effect member 721. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 712, a plurality of light emitting elements 713 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 723 of the upper left rear side production member 721 are disposed. A plate-like slide guide portion 716 that engages with the guide hole 702 of the upper left back side base portion 701 is attached to the upper rear side of the upper left back side movable member 711. A rack gear portion 717 that meshes with an upper left rear side drive gear (not shown) of the upper left rear side base portion 701 is formed on the upper edge portion of the upper left rear side movable member 711. When the upper left rear side movable member 711 moves to the upper left rear side initial position on the middle rear side of the upper left rear side movable member 711, it is detected by the upper left rear side initial position sensor 705a, and when the upper left rear side movable member 711 moves to the upper left rear side movable position, the upper left rear side A sensor detection unit 718 detected by the movable position sensor 705c is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the upper left back side effect member 721 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A plurality of translucent portions 723 arranged in the vertical direction are formed on the front side of the upper left rear side production member 721 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The translucent part 723 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 713 disposed on the lamp substrate 712 of the upper left back side movable member 711 and to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the upper left front base portion 731 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The upper left front base portion 731 includes an upper boss portion 732a formed on the upper rear side of the upper left front base portion 731, an intermediate boss portion 732b formed on the rear rear side, and a lower boss formed on the lower rear side. Using the part 732c, it is coupled to the front of the upper left back side base part 701. As a result, the upper left rear side effect member 721 and the upper left rear side movable member 711 are arranged in the gap between the upper left front side base portion 731 and the upper left rear side base portion 701.

  A vertical movement support portion 733 is formed on the right rear side of the upper left front side base portion 731 to support the vertical movement support member 741 connected to the upper left front side movable member 751 via the support connection member 756 so that the vertical movement support member 741 can move up and down in an oblique direction. Is done. A slot-like right guide hole 735 is formed near the left side of the vertical movement support portion 733 in the upper left front base portion 731. The vertical movement support portion 733 and the right guide hole 735 are formed to extend in a direction inclined obliquely to the right with respect to the vertical. The right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 are inserted into the right guide hole 735 so as to be slidable. An elongated left guide hole 734 is formed on the rear left side of the upper left front base portion 731. The left guide hole 734 is formed extending in the vertical direction. The left guide pin 759 of the upper left front movable member 751 engages with the left guide hole 734 so as to be slidable. As a result, the upper left front base portion 731 is positioned on the front side of the upper left front base portion 731 in the vicinity of the upper left side movable member 651 (the lower left front effect member 661) of the left standing initial position and extends in the vertical direction. (Hereinafter referred to as the upper initial position in order to distinguish it from other initial positions), the effect located in the vicinity of the upper part of the lower left front movable member 651 (lower left front effect member 661) at the left side tilt movable position below the upper initial position. The upper left front movable member 751 is supported so as to be vertically movable between a position (hereinafter referred to as a downward movable position in order to distinguish it from other performance positions).

  An upper initial position sensor (not shown) that detects that the upper left front movable member 751 has moved to the upper initial position is attached to the upper left side of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front base portion 731. A lower movable position sensor 736c that detects that the upper left front movable member 751 has moved to the lower movable position is attached to the lower left side of the right guide hole 735 on the rear side of the upper left front base portion 731. An upper left front drive motor 737 for moving the upper left front movable member 751 is attached to the upper rear side of the upper left front base portion 731. An upper left front drive mechanism 738 that moves the upper left front movable member 751 up and down using the rotational driving force of the upper left front drive motor 737 is provided on the rear side of the middle portion of the upper left front base portion 731.

The upper left front drive mechanism 738 includes a gear mechanism 739 that is rotationally driven by the upper left front drive motor 737 and a vertical movement support member 741. The vertical movement support member 741 is formed in a plate shape extending in the vertical direction using a resin material, and is supported by the vertical movement support part 733 of the upper left front side base part 731 so as to be vertically movable in an oblique direction. The front portion of the vertical movement support member 741 is connected to the upper left front movable member 751 via the support connection member 756. A rack gear portion 742 that meshes with the gear of the gear mechanism 739 is formed on the upper left side of the vertical movement support member 741. As a result, the vertical movement support member 741 moves up and down in an oblique direction in accordance with the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 739, and moves the upper left front movable member 751 connected to the vertical movement support member 741 through the support connection member 756 up and down. Move. When the vertical movement support member 741 moves the upper left front movable member 751 to the upper initial position below the left side of the vertical movement support member 741, it is detected by an upper initial position sensor (not shown), and the vertical movement support member 741 is moved to the upper left. When the front movable member 751 is moved to the lower movable position, a sensor detection unit 743 that is detected by the lower movable position sensor 736c is formed. A stopper portion 744 with which a protrusion 739a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 739 can abut is formed on the left rear side of the vertical movement support member 741. The stopper 744 restricts the movement of the upper left front movable member 751 beyond the upper initial position (upward), and restricts the movement of the upper left front movable member 751 beyond the lower movable position (downward).

  Note that the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front base portion 731 is inclined obliquely to the right so that the distance from the left guide hole 734 becomes narrower downward. On the other hand, the distance between the right guide pin 757 and auxiliary guide pin 758 of the support connecting member 756 and the left guide pin 759 of the upper left front side movable member 751 is constant. Accordingly, when the vertical movement support member 741 moves downward, the amount of movement of the right guide pin 757 and the auxiliary guide pin 758 directly below becomes smaller than the amount of movement of the left guide pin 759 directly below. Since the upper left front movable member 751 is configured to be rotatable relative to the support connecting member 756, the left upper front movable member 751 is inclined to the left as it moves downward together with the vertical movement support member 741 and the support connecting member 756. As described above, the upper left front movable member 751 driven by the vertical movement support member 741 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while inclining leftward from the state extending in the vertical direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front movable member 751 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The upper left front side movable member 751 is coupled to the upper left front side effect member 761 so as to cover the rear side of the upper left front side effect member 761. Thereby, the upper left front side production member 761 and the upper left front side movable member 751 are supported so as to be movable up and down between the upper initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the upper left front side base portion 731. A lamp substrate 752 is attached to the front portion of the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to face the light transmitting portion 763 of the upper left front side effect member 761. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 752, a plurality of light emitting elements 753 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 763 of the upper left front side production member 761 are disposed. A support connection member 756 that is connected to the vertical movement support member 741 of the upper left front side base portion 731 is attached to the right rear side of the upper left front side movable member 751. A left guide pin 759 that engages with the left guide hole 734 of the upper left front base portion 731 is formed on the rear left side of the upper left front movable member 751.

  The support connecting member 756 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material, and is attached to the upper left front movable member 751 so as to be relatively rotatable so as to overlap the right rear side of the upper left front movable member 751. Right guide pins 757 extending rearward are formed on the upper and lower sides of the support connecting member 756. The upper and lower right guide pins 757 are inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front base portion 731 and are connected to the vertical movement support member 741 by a connecting screw. An auxiliary guide pin 758 extending rearward and extending rearward is formed in the rear intermediate portion of the support connecting member 756. The auxiliary guide pin 758 is inserted into the right guide hole 735 of the upper left front base portion 731 and is coupled to the vertical movement support member 741.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the upper left front side production member 761 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A translucent portion 763 having a character shape is formed on the front side of the upper left front side production member 761 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The translucent part 763 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 753 disposed on the lamp substrate 752 of the upper left front side movable member 751 so as to emit light.

  In the lower left side production device 600 and the upper left side production device 700 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (during production standby), as shown in FIG. 21, the lower left front side production member 661 of the lower left production device 600 Is displaced to the left standing initial position, and the lower left rear side production member 621 moves to the lower left rear side initial position. Also, the upper left front side production member 761 of the upper left side production device 700 moves to the upper initial position, and the upper left rear side production member 721 moves to the upper left rear side initial position. At this time, the upper left front side production member 761 and the lower left front side production member 661 are vertically aligned and integrated, and a columnar integrated (having a predetermined character string) production member extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is formed. It becomes a state. At this time, the upper left rear side production member 721 is hidden behind the upper left front side production member 761, and the lower left rear side production member 621 is hidden behind the lower left front side production member 661.

  In a predetermined gaming state (during production operation), the lower left front side production member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) swings and displaces from the left standing initial position to the lower right side tilting movable position by the lower left front drive motor 637 and the like. To do. At this time, as shown in FIG. 22, the lower left front side production member 661 is inclined rightward from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and overlaps the front of the screen 95 a of the production display device 95.

  In a state where the lower left front side production member 661 (and the lower left front side movable member 651) is oscillating and displaced to the left side tilt movable position, the upper left front side production member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) is moved to the upper initial position by the upper left front side drive motor 737 and the like. To the lower movable position below. At this time, as shown in FIG. 23, the upper left front side production member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting to the left from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction), and swings to the left tilt movable position. It is located in the vicinity of the upper part of the lower left front side production member 661 that has been dynamically displaced. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect such that the integrated effect member including the upper left front effect member 761 and the lower left front effect member 661 collapses.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower left back side effect member 621 (and the lower left back side movable member 611) is moved from the lower left back side initial position to the lower left back side movable position by the left lower back side drive motor 603 or the like, the screen of the effect display device 95 is displayed. Appears in front of 95a. Further, when the upper left rear side production member 721 (and the upper left rear side movable member 711) is moved from the upper left rear side initial position to the upper left rear side movable position by the upper left rear side drive motor 703 or the like, it appears in front of the screen 95a of the production display device 95. If the lower left front side production member 661 swings and moves left or right, or the upper left front side production member 761 moves up and down, the lower left rear side production member 621 or the upper left rear production member 721 moves left and right. It is possible to perform a production operation rich in depth and three-dimensionality.

  In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform various unexpected effects. In addition, the upper left front drive motor 737 and the like, on the condition that the left lower tilt movable position sensor 636c detects that the lower left front effect member 661 (and the lower left front movable member 651) is oscillated and displaced to the left tilt movable position. The upper left front side production member 761 (and the upper left front side movable member 751) can be moved between the upper initial position and the lower movable position. On the other hand, when the upper left front side production member 761 returns to the upper initial position and the lower left front side production member 661 returns to the left standing initial position, the lower left front drive motor 637 and the like are operated by the upper initial position sensor (not shown). On the condition that it is detected that the member 761 has moved to the upper initial position, the lower left front-side effect member 661 can be rocked and displaced from the left tilt movable position to the left standing initial position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the upper left front side production member 761 and the lower left front side production member 661 from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the lower left side production device 600 and the upper left side production device 700 from malfunctioning.

[Configuration of the right side production device]
Next, the right effect device 800 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 43 to 57. As shown in FIG. 6, the right effect device 800 is provided on the right side of the center ornament 90 on the rear side of the base member 51 and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. In addition, an upper right front side production member 898 having a predetermined decoration is fixedly provided on the upper right side of the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51. The upper right front side production member 898 is arranged side by side above the right side production device 800 (lower right front side production member 891), and is configured to be visible from the front via the transparent base member 51. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the right effect device 800 includes a right back side base portion 801, a lower right back side movable member 821, a lower right back side effect member 831, an upper right back side movable member 841, and an upper right back side effect member. 851, a right front side base portion 861, a lower right front side movable member 881, and a lower right front side production member 891.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the right back base portion 801 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. An elongate guide hole 802 is formed below the middle part of the right back side base part 801. The guide hole 802 is formed so as to extend while being inclined to the upper left with respect to the horizontal. The slide guide portion 826 of the lower right back side movable member 821 engages with the guide hole 802 so as to be slidable. As a result, the right back base portion 801 is relatively (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) between the lower portion of the right back base portion 801 and the lower portion of the right front base portion 861. The right initial position (hereinafter referred to as the lower right back side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions) and the upper left position of the lower right back side initial position are located in front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95. The lower right back side movable member 821 is supported so as to be movable left and right between overlapping effect positions (hereinafter, referred to as the lower right back side movable position in order to distinguish from other effect positions).

  A lower right rear drive motor 803 for moving the lower right rear movable member 821 is attached to the lower rear side of the right rear base portion 801. A lower right back side drive mechanism 804 that moves the lower right back side movable member 821 using the rotational driving force of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is provided on the lower front side of the right back side base portion 801. The lower right back side drive mechanism 804 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and meshes with the rack gear portion 827 of the lower right back side movable member 821. A right lower back initial position sensor 805a for detecting that the right lower back movable member 821 has moved to the right lower back initial position is attached to the right side of the front middle portion of the right back base 801. A lower right rear side movable position sensor 805c for detecting that the lower right rear side movable member 821 has moved to the lower right rear side movable position is attached to the left side of the front middle part of the right rear side base part 801. An upper guide portion 819 is formed on the front side of the middle portion of the right back side base portion 801 to guide the rear upper edge portion of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to be slidable. Note that a gear cover 836 (see FIGS. 50 and 51) that covers the front side of the lower right back side drive mechanism 804 is attached to the lower front side of the right back side base portion 801.

  A link attachment portion 807 composed of a plurality of bosses is formed on the upper front side of the right back side base portion 801. A link base member 811 (see FIG. 53) is attached to the link attaching portion 807, and left and right link arm members 816a and 816b (see FIG. 53) are attached to be swingable. The front end portion (upper end portion) of the left link arm member 816a is connected to the left link connection portion 846a of the upper right backside movable member 841, and the front end portion (upper end portion) of the right link arm member 816b is connected to the right link of the upper right backside movable member 841. By being connected to the portion 846b, the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b constitute a parallel link mechanism. As a result, the right back side base portion 801 is relatively right between the upper portion of the right back side base portion 801 and the upper portion of the right front side base portion 861 (does not overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). Direction position (hereinafter referred to as the upper right back side initial position to distinguish it from other initial positions), and an effect position that is located at the lower left of the upper right back side initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 ( Hereinafter, the upper right rear movable member 841 is supported so as to be movable to the left and right in order to distinguish it from other production positions.

  An upper right rear drive motor 808 for moving the upper right rear movable member 841 is attached to the upper rear side of the right rear base portion 801. The upper right rear drive gear 809 moves the upper right rear movable member 841 by swinging the left and right link arm members 816a and 816b on the upper front side of the right rear base portion 801 using the rotational driving force of the upper right rear drive motor 808. Is attached. The upper right rear drive gear 809 meshes with the rack gear portion 817a of the left link arm member 816a. An upper right rear side initial position sensor 810a for detecting that the upper right rear side movable member 841 has moved to the upper right rear side initial position is attached to the upper right side of the front surface of the right rear side base portion 801. An upper right rear side movable position sensor 810c for detecting that the upper right rear side movable member 841 has moved to the upper right rear side movable position is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the right rear side base portion 801.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the link base member 811 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. On the left side of the link base member 811, a left link arm connection portion 812 a to which the base end portion (lower end portion) of the left link arm member 816 a is connected is formed. On the right side of the link base member 811, a right link arm connecting portion 812b to which the base end portion (lower end portion) of the right link arm member 816b is connected is formed. The left link arm member 816a is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. A rack gear portion 817a that meshes with the upper right rear side drive gear 809 of the right rear side base portion 801 is formed at the base end portion (lower end portion) of the left link arm member 816a. The right link arm member 816b is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. When the upper right backside movable member 841 moves to the upper right rear side initial position on the middle rear side of the right link arm member 816b, it is detected by the upper right back side initial position sensor 810a, and when the upper right back side movable member 841 moves to the upper right back side movable position, the upper right back side A sensor detection unit 818b detected by the movable position sensor 810c is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right back side movable member 821 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The lower right back side movable member 821 is coupled to the lower right back side effect member 831 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right back side effect member 831. The lower right back side production member 831 and the lower right back side movable member 821 are supported so as to be movable to the left and right between the right lower back side initial position and the right lower back side movable position with respect to the right back side base portion 801. A lamp substrate 822 is attached to the front portion of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to face the light transmitting portion 833 of the lower right back side effect member 831. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 822, a plurality of light emitting elements 823 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 833 of the lower right back side rendering member 831 are disposed. A plate-like slide guide portion 826 that engages with the guide hole 802 of the right back side base portion 801 is attached to the rear side of the middle portion of the lower right back side movable member 821. A rack gear portion 827 that meshes with the gear of the lower right back side drive mechanism 804 of the right back side base portion 801 is formed at the lower edge portion of the lower right back side movable member 821. When the lower right back side movable member 821 moves to the lower right back side initial position on the middle rear side of the lower right back side movable member 821, it is detected by the lower right back side initial position sensor 805a, and the lower right back side movable member 821 is movable right lower back side. When moved to the position, a sensor detection unit 828 is formed which is detected by the lower right back side movable position sensor 805c.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the lower right back side effect member 831 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A plurality of translucent portions 833 arranged in the vertical direction are formed on the front side of the lower right back side production member 831 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The translucent part 833 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 823 disposed on the lamp substrate 822 of the lower right back side movable member 821 so as to emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right rear movable member 841 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The upper right back side movable member 841 is coupled to the upper right back side effect member 851 so as to cover the rear side of the upper right back side effect member 851. Thereby, the upper right rear side production member 851 and the upper right rear side movable member 841 are supported so as to be movable left and right between the upper right rear side initial position and the upper right rear side movable position with respect to the right rear side base portion 801. A lamp substrate 842 is attached to the front part of the upper right rear side movable member 841 so as to face the light transmitting part 853 of the upper right rear side production member 851. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 842, a plurality of light emitting elements 843 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 853 of the upper right back side rendering member 851 are disposed. A left link connecting portion 846a to which the front end portion (upper end portion) of the left link arm member 816a is connected is formed on the upper left rear side of the upper right back side movable member 841. A right link connecting portion 846b to which the front end portion (upper end portion) of the right link arm member 816b is connected is formed on the rear side of the upper right portion of the upper right back side movable member 841.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the upper right rear side production member 851 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A plurality of translucent portions 853 arranged vertically are formed on the front side of the upper right rear side production member 851 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The translucent part 853 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 843 disposed on the lamp substrate 842 of the upper right back side movable member 841 so as to emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the right front base portion 861 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The right front base portion 861 is formed in front of the right back base portion 801 using an upper boss portion 862a formed on the upper rear side of the right front side base portion 861 and an intermediate boss portion 862b formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion. Combined. As a result, the lower right back side effect member 831 and the lower right back side movable member 821 are arranged in the gap between the lower part of the right front side base portion 861 and the lower side portion of the right back side base portion 801. Further, an upper right rear side production member 851 and an upper right rear side movable member 841 are arranged in a gap between the upper part of the right front side base part 861 and the upper part of the right rear side base part 801.

  A tilt support portion 864 that rotatably supports a tilt support member 871 connected to the lower right front movable member 881 is formed in the lower middle portion of the right front base portion 861. A plate-like guide wall portion 865 is attached to the front side of the middle portion of the right front side base portion 861. The upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 is formed to extend in a curved shape so that the upper side is convex. A guide piece portion 887 of the lower right front movable member 881 is disposed on the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 so as to be slidable. As a result, the right front base portion 861 is distinguished from other initial positions (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions) extending in the vertical direction (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95) on the front side of the right front base portion 861. The right side standing initial position) and the stage position that tilts to the left from the right side standing initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the stage display device 95 (hereinafter tilted to the right to distinguish it from other stage positions). The lower right front movable member 881 is supported so as to be swingable and displaceable.

  A right standing initial position sensor 866a that detects that the lower right front movable member 881 has been displaced to the right standing initial position is attached to the position immediately above the tilt support portion 864 on the rear side of the right front base portion 861. A right tilt movable position sensor 866c for detecting that the lower right front movable member 881 is displaced to the right tilt movable position is attached to the upper left of the tilt support portion 864 on the rear side of the right front base portion 861. A lower right front drive motor 867 for moving the lower right front movable member 881 is attached to the lower rear side of the right front base portion 861. A lower right front drive mechanism 868 that swings and displaces the lower right front movable member 881 using the rotational driving force of the lower right front drive motor 867 is provided on the lower rear side of the right front base portion 861. A decorative member 896 is attached to the lower front side of the right front side base portion 861 so as to cover the base end portions (lower end portions) of the lower right front side production member 891 and the lower right front side movable member 881 (see FIGS. 46 and 47). reference).

The lower right front drive mechanism 868 includes a gear mechanism 869 that is rotationally driven by a lower right front drive motor 867 and a tilt support member 871. The tilt support member 871 is formed in a disk shape using a resin material and is rotatably supported by the tilt support portion 864 of the right front side base portion 861. The front portion of the tilt support member 871 is connected to the connecting shaft portion 886 of the lower right front movable member 881. An elongated hole-shaped engagement hole 872 that protrudes to the side (downward) of the tilt support member 871 is formed on the side of the tilt support member 871. An engagement pin 869a provided on the gear of the gear mechanism 869 is engaged with the engagement hole portion 872 so as to be slidable. Accordingly, the tilt support member 871 rotates according to the rotation of the gear of the gear mechanism 869 and swings and displaces the lower right front movable member 881 connected to the tilt support member 871. When the tilt support member 871 swings and displaces the lower right front movable member 881 to the right standing initial position at the side of the tilt support member 871, it is detected by the right standing initial position sensor 866a, and the tilt support member 871 lower right. When the front side movable member 881 is oscillated and displaced to the right side tilt movable position, a sensor detection unit 873 detected by the right side tilt movable position sensor 866c is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the lower right front movable member 881 is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically using a resin material. The lower right front side movable member 881 is coupled to the lower right front side effect member 891 so as to cover the rear side of the lower right front side effect member 891. Thereby, the lower right front side production member 891 and the lower right front side movable member 881 are supported so as to be swingable and displaceable between the right standing initial position and the right side tilt movable position with respect to the right front side base portion 861. A lamp substrate 882 is attached to the upper front side of the lower right front movable member 881 so as to face the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front effect member 891. On the mounting surface of the lamp substrate 882, a plurality of light emitting elements 883 that emit light from the light transmitting portion 893 of the lower right front side production member 891 are disposed. A connecting shaft portion 886 that is connected to the tilt support member 871 of the right front base portion 861 is formed on the lower rear side of the lower right front movable member 881. A guide piece portion 887 is formed on the rear side of the middle portion of the lower right front movable member 881 so as to be slidable on the upper surface of the guide wall portion 865 of the right front base portion 861.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the lower right front side production member 891 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material having translucency. A translucent portion 893 having a character shape is formed on the upper front side of the lower right front side production member 891 to which a predetermined decoration is applied. The translucent part 893 is configured to transmit light from the light emitting element 883 disposed on the lamp substrate 882 of the lower right front movable member 881 so as to emit light.

  In the right effect device 800 configured as described above, in the normal gaming state (in effect standby), the lower right front effect member 891 is displaced to the right standing initial position as shown in FIG. Further, the lower right back side production member 831 moves to the lower right back side initial position, and the upper right back side production member 851 moves to the upper right back side initial position. At this time, the upper right front side production member 898 (see FIG. 6) and the lower right front side production member 891 are integrated side by side in the vertical direction and have a columnar integrated (predetermined character string) extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ) A production member is formed. At this time, the lower right front side production member 891 and the upper right back side production member 851 are hidden behind the lower right front side production member 891.

  In a predetermined gaming state (during production operation), the lower right front side production member 891 (and the lower right front side movable member 881) is moved from the right standing initial position to the lower right side tilt movable position by the lower right front drive motor 867 and the like. Oscillating displacement. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44, the lower right front side production member 891 is tilted to the left from the state extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the production display device 95. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect such that the integrated effect member including the upper right front effect member 898 and the lower right front effect member 891 collapses.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the lower right back side production member 831 (and the lower right back side movable member 821) is moved from the lower right back side initial position to the lower right back side movable position by the lower right back side drive motor 803 or the like, the production is performed. Appears in front of the screen 95a of the display device 95. Further, when the upper right back side production member 851 (and the upper right back side movable member 841) is moved from the upper right back side initial position to the upper right back side movable position by the right upper side drive motor 808 or the like, it appears in front of the screen 95a of the production display device 95. If the lower right back side production member 831 or the upper right back side production member 851 moves to the left and right as the lower right front side production member 891 swings and moves to the left and right, the production operation with rich depth and stereoscopic effect can be achieved. Can be done. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a variety of surprising effects.

[Configuration of lower production device]
Next, the lower rendering device 900 will be described with additional reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 4, the lower rendering device 900 is provided below the center decoration 90 on the rear side of the base member 51. As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the lower side production device 900 includes a lower base part 901, a first back side movable support part 921, a second back side movable support part 931, a first back side effect member 941, The second back side effect member 946, the first front side movable support part 951, the second front side movable support part 961, the first front side effect member 971, and the second front side effect member 981 are configured.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the lower base portion 901 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. A rail-shaped guide rail portion 902 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the front side of the intermediate portion of the lower base portion 901. The guide rail portion 902 engages with the guide groove portion 922 of the first back side movable support portion 921 so as to be slidable. Thereby, the lower base portion 901 is distinguished from the other initial positions (hereinafter referred to as other initial positions) on the front side of the lower base portion 901 (not overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95). (Referred to as a lower initial position) and an effect position that is located above the lower initial position and overlaps the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 (hereinafter referred to as a lower movable position to distinguish it from other effect positions). The first back side movable support portion 921 is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A rectangular protrusion-shaped stopper portion 903 is formed on the front upper side of the center of the lower base portion 901.

  A movable support portion drive motor 904 for moving the first back side movable support portion 921 is attached to the rear side of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901. A movable support driving mechanism 905 that moves the first backside movable support 921 using the rotational driving force of the movable support driving motor 904 is provided on the left rear side of the lower base 901. The movable support drive mechanism 905 includes a plurality of gears (gears) including a pinion gear 906. The pinion gear 906 of the movable support driving mechanism 905 meshes with the rack gear 924 of the first backside movable support 921, and a rack and pinion mechanism provided across the lower base 901 and the first backside movable support 921. Configure. A movable position sensor detection unit 907 that is detected by the lower movable position sensor 908c when the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the lower movable position is formed on the front side of the upper right portion of the lower base portion 901. A lower initial position sensor 908a for detecting that the first back side movable support portion 921 has moved to the lower initial position is attached to the lower left front side of the lower base portion 901.

  A left arm member 911 is attached to the front side of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be swingable in the vertical direction. The left arm member 911 is formed in a plate shape using a resin material. An elongated left engagement hole 912 extending along the extending direction of the left arm member 911 is formed on the distal end side of the left arm member 911. The left engagement pin 926 of the first backside movable support portion 921 engages with the left engagement hole 912 so as to be slidable. Thereby, the front end side of the left arm member 911 is connected to the left lower rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The left arm member 911 is attached to the front side of the left end portion of the lower base portion 901 together with the left biasing spring 913. The left biasing spring 913 is configured using a torsion coil spring, and applies a biasing force in a direction in which the left arm member 911 swings upward.

A right arm member 916 is attached to the front side of the right end portion of the lower base portion 901 so as to be swingable in the vertical direction. The right arm member 916 is formed symmetrically with the left arm member 911 using a resin material. An elongated right engagement hole 917 extending along the extending direction of the right arm member 916 is formed on the distal end side of the right arm member 916. The right engagement pin 927 of the first backside movable support portion 921 engages with the right engagement hole 917 so as to be slidable. Thus, the right arm member 916
Is connected to the lower right rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. The right arm member 916 is attached to the front side of the right end portion of the lower base portion 901 together with the right biasing spring 918. The right biasing spring 918 is configured using a torsion coil spring, and applies a biasing force in a direction in which the right arm member 916 swings upward. The left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are arranged symmetrically so as to extend toward the center side of the lower base portion 901, and the first back side movable support portion 921 is vertically oriented with respect to the lower base portion 901. It is configured to swing in the vertical direction as it moves.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the first backside movable support portion 921 is formed in a plate shape that extends to the left and right using a resin material. The first back side movable support portion 921 is coupled to the second back side movable support portion 931 so as to cover the rear side of the second back side movable support portion 931. Accordingly, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the lower initial position and the lower movable position with respect to the lower base portion 901. . A groove-shaped guide groove portion 922 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The guide groove portion 922 is slidably engaged with the guide rail portion 902 of the lower base portion 901. A groove-like stopper groove portion 923 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the rear side of the central portion of the first back side movable support portion 921. The stopper groove portion 923 receives the stopper portion 903 of the lower base portion 901. Accordingly, the stopper portion 903 restricts the movement of the first back side movable support portion 921 beyond the lower initial position (downward), and exceeds the lower side movable position of the first back side movable support portion 921 (upward). Restrict movement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like from coming out of the lower base portion 901, and it is possible to prevent the lower rendering device 900 from being damaged.

  A rack gear portion 924 is formed on the left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921 with the tooth portion facing leftward and extending in the vertical direction. The rack gear portion 924 meshes with the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901 disposed on the left side of the rack gear portion 924. An initial position sensor detection unit 925 that is detected by the lower initial position sensor 908a when the first rear movable support portion 921 moves to the lower initial position is formed on the rear left side of the first rear movable support portion 921. A left engagement pin 926 that is slidably engaged with the left engagement hole 912 of the left arm member 911 is formed on the lower left rear side of the first back side movable support portion 921. A right engagement pin 927 that is slidably engaged with the right engagement hole 917 of the right arm member 916 is formed on the rear side of the lower right portion of the first back side movable support portion 921.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the second back-side movable support portion 931 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. A first back-side rotation support portion 932 is formed on the upper left front side of the second back-side movable support portion 931. The first back side rotation support part 932 is an initial position where the first back side production member 941 is hidden behind the first front side production member 971 in the gap between the second back side movable support part 931 and the first front side movable support part 951 ( Hereinafter, in order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it will be referred to as a first back side initial position), and an effect position (hereinafter referred to as other) that rotates clockwise from the first back side initial position (viewed from the front) and is visible from the front. The first back side effect member 941 is supported so as to be rotatable between the first back side effect position and the first back side movable position. A second back side rotation support portion 933 is formed on the front side of the lower right side of the second back side movable support portion 931. The second back side rotation support part 933 is an initial position where the second back side effect member 946 is hidden behind the second front side effect member 981 in the gap between the second back side movable support part 931 and the first front side movable support part 951 ( Hereinafter, in order to distinguish it from other initial positions, it will be referred to as a second back side initial position), and an effect position (hereinafter referred to as other) that rotates clockwise from the second back side initial position (viewed from the front) and is visible from the front. The second back side effect member 946 is rotatably supported between the second back side effect position and the second back side movable position.

A back-side rotation drive motor 934 for moving the first back-side effect member 941 and the second back-side effect member 946 is attached to the front side of the upper right part of the second back-side movable support portion 931. A back side rotation drive mechanism 935 that rotates the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 using the rotational driving force of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is provided on the upper rear side of the second back side movable support portion 931. It is done. The back side rotation drive mechanism 935 includes a plurality of gears, and rotates the first back side effect member 941 between the first back side initial position and the first back side movable position, and at the same time, the second back side effect member 946 is rotated between the second back side initial position and the second back side movable position.

  A first back-side initial position sensor 936a that detects that the first back-side effect member 941 has rotated to the first back-side initial position is attached to the left front side of the second back-side movable support portion 931. A first back-side movable position sensor 936c that detects that the first back-side effect member 941 has rotated to the first back-side movable position is attached to the upper front side of the second back-side movable support portion 931. A lower movable position sensor 908c for detecting that the first rear movable support portion 921 has moved to the lower movable position is attached to the lower right rear side of the second rear movable support portion 931. The lower movable position sensor 908c is exposed rearward through an opening (not shown) formed in the lower right portion of the first backside movable support portion 921.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the first back side production member 941 is formed in a plate shape with a star-shaped decoration using a resin material. A first sensor detection unit 942 that is detected by the first back side initial position sensor 936a when the first back side direction member 941 rotates and moves to the first back side initial position is formed at the base end portion of the first back side direction member 941. A second sensor detection unit 943 that is detected by the first back side movable position sensor 936c when the first back side direction member 941 rotates and moves to the first back side movable position is formed in an intermediate portion of the first back side direction member 941. The second back side effect member 946 is formed of a resin material into a plate shape with a star-like decoration, like the first back side effect member 941.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the first front-side movable support portion 951 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. The first front side movable support portion 951 is formed on the upper rear side of the first front side movable support portion 951, the upper boss portion 952 formed on the rear side of the intermediate portion, and the lower rear side. The lower back boss portion 954 is used to be coupled to the front side of the second back side movable support portion 931. Accordingly, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are disposed in the gap between the first front side movable support part 951 and the second back side movable support part 931. The first front side movable support portion 951 is coupled to the second front side movable support portion 961 so as to cover the rear side of the second front side movable support portion 961. As a result, the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961, and the first back side movable support portion 921 and the second back side movable support portion 931 are positioned at the lower initial position with respect to the lower base portion 901. It is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the lower movable position.

  A guide rail portion 956 extending left and right is formed on the lower front side of the first front side movable support portion 951. The guide rail portion 956 supports the slide guide portion 976 of the first front side production member 971 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the first front side movable support portion 951 and the second front side movable support portion 961 are positioned at the initial positions where the first front side effect member 971 contacts the second front side effect member 981 on the front side of the second front side movable support portion 961 ( Hereinafter, the first front side initial position for distinguishing from the other initial positions) and the effect position leftward from the first front side initial position (hereinafter, the first front side movable position for distinguishing from the other effect positions). The first front-side effect member 971 is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 68, the second front-side movable support portion 961 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right using a resin material. Similar to the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946, a back side decoration part 962 with star-shaped decoration is formed on the front side of the middle part of the second front side movable support part 961. An elongated guide hole 966 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the upper right portion of the second front side movable support portion 961. The upper second connecting pin 984 of the second front side production member 981 is inserted into the guide hole 966 so as to be slidable. As a result, the first front movable support portion 951 and the second front movable support portion 961 are positioned at the initial positions where the second front side effect member 981 contacts the first front side effect member 971 on the front side of the second front side movable support portion 961 ( Hereinafter, the second front side initial position for distinguishing from the other initial positions) and the effect position moving to the right from the second front side initial position (hereinafter, the second front side movable position for distinguishing from other effect positions). The second front side effect member 981 is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

  A front side drive motor 967 for moving the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 is attached to the rear side of the center part of the second front side movable support part 961. A front side drive mechanism 968 that moves the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 using the rotational driving force of the front side drive motor 967 is provided on the rear side of the center portion of the second front side movable support part 961. The front drive mechanism 968 is configured to have a plurality of gears, and meshes with the first rack gear portion 978 of the first front movable support portion 951 and meshes with the second rack gear portion 988 of the second front side effect member 981. It has become. The front-side drive mechanism 968 moves the first front-side effect member 971 in the left-right direction between the first front-side initial position and the first front-side movable position, and at the same time moves the second front-side effect member 981 to the second front-side initial position and the second front-side initial position. 2. Move to the left-right direction between the front-side movable position.

  A first front-side initial position sensor 969a that detects that the first front-side effect member 971 has moved to the first front-side initial position is attached to the right of the lower rear side of the second front-side movable support portion 961. A first front-side movable position sensor 969c that detects that the first front-side effect member 971 has moved to the first front-side movable position is attached to the left of the lower rear side of the second front-side movable support portion 961. A front biasing spring 965 is attached to the rear left upper side of the second front movable support portion 961. The front side biasing spring 965 is configured using a tension coil spring, and applies a biasing force in a direction in which the second front side production member 981 moves to the second front side initial position (to the left).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the first front-side effect member 971 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined decoration using a resin material. A first guide member 973 is connected to the rear side of the first front side production member 971 via upper and lower first connection pins 974 and 975. The first guide member 973 is formed in a plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction using a resin material, and is formed between the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961 by the upper and lower first connecting pins 974 and 975. Arranged in the gap. A slide guide portion 976 that is slidably supported by the guide rail portion 956 of the first front-side movable support portion 951 is formed at the lower edge portion of the first guide member 973. A first rack gear portion 978 that meshes with the gear of the front side drive mechanism 968 of the second front side movable support portion 961 is formed on the upper edge portion of the first guide member 973. When the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side initial position on the front side of the first guide member 973, it is detected by the first front side initial position sensor 969a, and when the first front side effect member 971 moves to the first front side movable position. A sensor detection unit 979 detected by the first front side movable position sensor 969c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the second front side production member 981 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined decoration using a resin material. When the first front side production member 971 moves to the first front side initial position and the second front side production member 981 moves to the second front side initial position, the first front side production member 971 and the second front side production member 981 come into contact with each other. They are integrated to form an integrated decorative shape (for example, a shape imitating an animal). A second guide member 983 is connected to the rear side of the second front side production member 981 via upper and lower second connection pins 984 and 985. The second guide member 983 is formed in a plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction using a resin material, and is formed between the first front movable support portion 951 and the second front movable support portion 961 by the upper and lower second connecting pins 984 and 985. Arranged in the gap. The upper second connecting pin 984 is slidably inserted into the guide hole 966 of the second front movable support portion 961. A second rack gear portion 988 that meshes with a gear of the front side drive mechanism 968 of the second front side movable support portion 961 is formed on the lower edge portion of the second guide member 983.

In the lower rendering device 900 configured as described above, a normal gaming state (while waiting for rendering)
58, the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961, and the first back-side movable support portion 921 and the second back-side movable support portion 931 are moved to the lower initial position. The first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotated to the first back side initial position and the second back side initial position, and the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 are the first front side initial position. And it moves to the 2nd front side initial position. At this time, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 are in contact and integrated, and when viewed from the front, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 support the second front side movable support. The front side of the back side decoration part 962 of the part 961 is covered. At this time, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are hidden behind the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981. Also, at this time, as shown in FIG. 59, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are attached to the left side as the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the lower initial position relatively below. The state of swinging downward against the urging force of the urging spring 913 and the right urging spring 918 is obtained.

  In the predetermined gaming state (during the production operation), as shown in FIG. 60, the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961, the first back-side movable support portion 921 and the second back-side movable support portion. 931 is moved from the lower initial position to the upper lower movable position by the movable support driving motor 904 and the like. At this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are in a state of swinging upward as the first back side movable support portion 921 relatively moves to the lower movable position. Further, at this time, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 use the urging force of the left urging spring 913 and the right urging spring 918 to apply a force to move upward with respect to the first backside movable support portion 921. Add.

  With the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961 and the first back-side movable support portion 921 and the second back-side movable support portion 931 moved to the lower movable position, the front-side drive motor 967 and the like The first front side production member 971 moves from the first front side initial position to the left first front side movable position, and the second front side production member 981 moves from the second front side initial position to the right second front side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61, the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981 are separated from each other left and right, and from the front through the gap between the first front side effect member 971 and the second front side effect member 981. It will be in the state which can visually recognize the back side decoration part 962 of the 2nd front side movable support part 961. FIG.

  With the first front side production member 971 and the second front side production member 981 moved to the first front side initial position and the second front side initial position, the first back side production member 941 is moved to the first back side initial stage by the back side rotational drive motor 934 and the like. The second back side effect member 946 is rotated from the second back side initial position to the second back side movable position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62, the first back-side effect member 941 appears above the second front-side movable support portion 961 and is visible from the front. At this time, the second back side effect member 946 appears below the second front side movable support portion 961 and is visible from the front. In this state, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 and the back side decoration part 962 of the second front side movable support part 961 are integrated to form an integrated decoration shape in which a plurality of stars are arranged. Is done.

The first back side production member 941 and the second back side production member 946 have different shapes. Therefore, in the state where the first front-side movable support portion 951 and the second front-side movable support portion 961, the first back-side movable support portion 921 and the second back-side movable support portion 931 are moved to the lower movable position, the first back-side production member When the 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved, the center of gravity of the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like is moved and easily displaced in the left-right direction. As a result, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 may be displaced in the left-right direction, and may be disengaged from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. In the present embodiment, even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotationally moved by the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921, 1 The lateral displacement of the backside movable support portion 921 and the like is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and coming off from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a failure of the lower rendering device 900.

  When the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like are moved to the lower side movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is moved to the end portion on the front end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911. The right engagement pin 927 comes into contact with the end portion on the distal end side of the right engagement hole 917 in the right arm member 916. Then, since the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 are more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are obtained with the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like moved to the lower side movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates, the displacement of the first backside movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. At this time, the force to displace the first backside movable support portion 921 and the like is easily transmitted to the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916, but the biasing force of the left biasing spring 913 and the right biasing spring 918 As a result, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 are restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction, whereby the first back-side movable support portion 921 and the like are effectively restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction. Further, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like are prevented from moving upward beyond the lower side movable position and coming off the lower base portion 901. For this reason, it is possible to more reliably prevent a failure of the lower rendering device 900.

[Control configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board, An I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and a random number generation circuit 105 that operates as a system different from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include is mounted, and the main CPU 101 is configured to execute main control related to game progression in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 102. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main control board 100 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock and the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit for returning to a normal state, a CTC circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time, and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage means that is backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply board 450. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as a stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off. ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area.

The random number generation circuit 105 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (built-in random numbers) according to a certain rule by updating once based on the clock signal (1 clock) from the clock circuit (1 clock 1 random number generation method). The initial value of the built-in random number is a numerical value calculated by a predetermined calculation based on the ID number (unique identification information given to each microcomputer) of the main control microcomputer 110, and is changed every time the system is reset. This built-in random number forms a part of a random number per special symbol used in the lottery for special symbols described later.

  The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the big prize port switch 76, and the like, via the I / O port circuit 104. Thus, detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101. In addition, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 81, a second special symbol display device 82, a first special symbol hold lamp 83, a second special symbol hold lamp 84, a normal symbol display device 85, and a general figure hold lamp. 86, and is further electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 68 and the special electric accessory solenoid 78, and receives a control signal from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. It transmits to various display means and various solenoids.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are communicably connected in only a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. The effect control command is transmitted. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area that is a temporary storage area, An effect comprising a RAM 203 functioning as a buffer memory, an I / O port circuit 204 for inputting / outputting signals between peripheral boards and devices, and a serial communication circuit 205 for inputting / outputting serial data. A control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 is mounted, and the sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to game effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the production control board 200 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, or when the sub main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away. Equipped with a WDT circuit that returns to normal state, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, etc. Are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to provide an image and sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 291. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 292, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and image control commands related to images and sound are transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the lamp connection board 291 and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) via a serial communication circuit. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 291 employ clock-synchronized serial transmission, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. In synchronization with the clock signal, the ramp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line. The lamp connection board 291 includes an LED driver (not shown) that functions in response to the LED drive lamp control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200. Based on the lamp control signal, the switch in the circuit is switched. By switching on / off, the drive current is supplied to or cut off from the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is turned on or off.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the motor driver 292, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) to the motor driver 292 via the I / O port circuit 204. The motor driver 292 switches each switch in the circuit on / off based on a driving control signal for driving an accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200, whereby each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, A drive current is supplied to or cut off from the motor M of the upper left rendering device 700, the right rendering device 800, and the lower rendering device 900) to control each rendering device to operate.

  The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a program ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work that serves as a temporary storage area. RAM 303 that functions as an area or buffer memory, VDP 304 that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and acoustic data that corresponds to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 A sound source IC 305 is mounted. The VDP 304 is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM 306 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-sub CPU, and performs image processing on the image data (image data) to generate an image display device DS (effect display). Device 95 and sub-display device 561). The VPD 304 is connected to a high-speed VRAM 307 used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM 306. The sound source IC 305 reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM 308 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the data to the speaker 8 via an amplifier (digital amplifier) (not shown). .

  The payout control board 400 is composed mainly of a payout CPU 401, ROM 402 and RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 35 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 and controls to pay out a prize ball. And the ball feeding mechanism 21 and the firing mechanism 22 are driven synchronously based on the operation amount of the firing handle 12 to control the launch of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 450 has a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island, and a backup power supply. (VBB) is generated, and a power-off monitoring circuit for monitoring power-off due to a voltage drop is provided. The electronic / electrical parts such as control boards and game machines Supply the necessary power. The power supply board 450 is connected to a power switch for starting the power supply circuit. When the power supply switch is turned on on the assumption that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device on the amusement island, Predetermined power is supplied to each control board and the like from 450 normal power supply circuits. The power supply board 450 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the amusement island has been cut off. , To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device on the game island. The power supply board 450 is connected to a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. Note that the RAM clear switch may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 450, for example.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 are provided is exemplified as the effect control structure of the pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, on one (production) control board, a sub-main CPU that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects, a sub-sub CPU that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects, a VDP that generates image data in accordance with the contents of effects, etc. It may be configured. Further, for example, when the production control board 200 and the image control board 300, or a plurality of three or more control boards are provided, a sound source IC that generates acoustic data in accordance with the production content is mounted on the production control board 200. There may be a configuration in which the sound source IC is mounted on the third control board (in the case of three or more), and the configuration of effect control of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed as appropriate. .

[Main functional configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / the effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.

<Main control board>
71. As shown in FIG. 71, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry judging means 110, a game lottery random number generating means 120, a holding control means 130, a prior judgment means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, Demonstration effect setting means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, gaming state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190 are included. Note that each of the above-described means in the main control board 100 is configured by main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, hardware such as an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional representation of things.

  Based on the detection signals from the first start port switch 61, the second start port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, and the big winning port switch 76, the winning ball determination unit 110 determines whether or not the game ball has entered each winning port. judge.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit 105 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be described later to the random number per special symbol used in the lottery determination of the special symbol. Is generated. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to form a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of the soft random number per special symbol, Special symbols for determining the random number of symbols per special symbol used for determining the winning symbol (the combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, the initial value and the end value of the symbol random number per special symbol The initial symbol random number per symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, and the random number per normal symbol Includes initial value random numbers per normal symbol to determine, normal symbol variation pattern random number to use for selection of variation pattern of ordinary symbols, etc. That. These software random numbers are updated once every time timer interrupt processing occurs, and the remaining time of the interrupt cycle is maintained even when timer interrupt processing is not being executed for the initial value random number (during loop processing). Update using.

  The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, which is a lottery random value for the special symbol game, when the game ball enters the first starting port 60 or the second starting port 65. The design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reserved ball information of the first special design or the second special design. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means that combines the action holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) with the entering order of the holding balls. The first special symbol reservation storage area of 180 or the second special symbol reservation storage area is temporarily stored.

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, a reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), a reserved 2 storage area (2 A reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reserved storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as the operating reserved ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage. Digested in order of area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the reserved ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage areas, respectively. The contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol hold control means 131 has a first special symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for counting the number of active hold balls of the second special symbol. It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one special reserved action ball is acquired as an update process of the number of special reserved action balls. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  Further, when the special symbol holding control means 131 updates the number of the active reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol holding control means 131 includes an effect control command (referred to as a “symbol memory number command”) including update information of the number of held balls. ) And is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This 1 command includes information on both the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In principle, the action-reserved balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variable special symbol is displayed with priority over the first special symbol. In order to adopt so-called preferential digestion, while there is an operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game, regardless of the presence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest spheres.

  The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, the random number value per normal symbol, the symbol random value per normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, when the game ball enters the operation gate 70 as an opportunity. A random value is acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control unit 132 stores the normal symbol operation holding ball information in the normal symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form combined with the order of entering the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (four). Memorize temporarily. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of normal reserved operation balls. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal reserved actuated ball is acquired as the update processing of the number of held normal symbols of the active normal symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

When the predetermination means 135 acquires the operation reservation ball of the special symbol at a predetermined predetermination timing, the predetermination means 135 executes the advance determination of the pre-reading notice effect for the operation reservation ball. Here, the pre-reading notice effect refers to a preliminary decision such as a lottery for an undigested action-holding ball for which a special symbol variation display is pending, and the result of the judgment is notified to the player in advance. It is an effect to notify. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting and when the action holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting and When the support holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the support function is operating, (3) When the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, When you are satisfied. Specifically, the pre-determination unit 135 reads a random number value corresponding to the currently reserved ball for operation from the special symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and pre-determined pre-decision for a lottery (pre-pre- ), Pre-determination of pre-reading symbol lottery (pre-determination of symbol), and pre-determination of pre-reading variation pattern lottery (pre-determination of variation pattern). The prior determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command including information on the result of the previous / failure determination, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol success / failure determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the random number value per special symbol and the symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest storage area (hold 1 storage area) in the special symbol hold storage area The random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out and stored in the special symbol success / failure determination region, the special symbol symbol determination region, and the special symbol variation pattern determination region of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, as an example, the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. (1) No big hit or small hit is in effect. (2) Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation. (3) When all the conditions of the operation holding ball exist in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start to fluctuate. It is judged that there is.

  The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the determination of the success / failure. Decide what to do. The result of the lottery determination is temporarily stored in a special symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and loss data “00H”), and is used in subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the special symbol changes. The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to in the determination of success / failure.

  Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / losing lottery table, where (A) is a table referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability state). It is a table to be referenced. In this special symbol success / failure lottery table, random numbers per special symbol and judgment results of big hits, small hits, and losing are associated with each other. Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 72, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random value falls within the range of 0 to 163, it is a big hit. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability varies from the low probability state (164/65536) to the high probability state (1640/65536). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, for example, in the lottery determination of the second special symbol, it may be configured so that there is no small hit.

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the first or second special symbol determination. To do. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol per symbol table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol and a symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 73A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per first special symbol. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (the number of operations of the probability variation function and variation time shortening function of the special symbol, the big prize opening 64 Are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “2” to “11” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, in the symbols “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”, the symbol group A (the 12R specified short-time symbol 1) includes symbols “6”, “7”, “8”, Symbol group B (2R specific time short symbol) is associated with “9”, and symbol group C (12R normal time short symbol) is associated with symbols “10” and “11”, respectively. The “specific symbol” is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the “normal symbol” is a symbol that does not activate the probability variation function after the end of the special game (described later). The same applies to the second special symbol group).

  The symbol group A is a specific symbol indicating a so-called “probability hit”, in which the game state after the end of the special game is transferred to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and the probability change function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurrence In addition, a variable time shortening function and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds for the special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group B shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, although the number of times and the opening time of the special winning opening 64 are different as compared to the above “probability hit”. A special symbol indicating a so-called “sudden probability change hit”, and a probability change function and a change time shortening function of a special symbol and an electric chew support function are provided until the next big hit occurrence. The specified number of rounds in the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  The symbol group C is a normal symbol indicating so-called “normal hit” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the normal state (low probability state), and a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game (50 times in this example). For example, a special symbol variation time reduction function and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds for the special game is 12 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “12” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol group “12” is associated with the symbol “12”. In the case of a small hit, the gaming state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electric chew support function) is not triggered, and the gaming state is maintained before and after the winning lottery. When the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “1” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

Subsequently, FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per second special symbol. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the stop symbol, the symbol group, the content of the jackpot (the number of operations of the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, the big prize opening 64 for the symbol random value per special symbol) Are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “13” to “22” of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbols “13”, “14”, “15”, “16”
Symbol group D (16R specific short-lived symbol) is symbol “17”, “18”, symbol group E (2R specific short-lived symbol) is symbol “19”, “20”, “21”, “22” Are associated with the symbol group F (2R normal time symbol).

  The symbol group D is a specific symbol showing a so-called “probable hit” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to a special symbol probability variation state (high probability state), and the probability variation function of the special symbol until the next big hit occurrence In addition, a variable time shortening function and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of special games is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group E shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, although the number of times and the opening time of the special winning opening 64 are different from the above “probability variation”. A special symbol indicating a so-called “sudden probability change hit”, and a probability change function and a change time shortening function of a special symbol and an electric chew support function are provided until the next big hit occurrence. The specified number of rounds in the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  The symbol group F is a normal symbol indicating so-called “normal hit” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the normal state (low probability state), and a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) after the end of the special game. For example, a special symbol variation time reduction function and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds in the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “23” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “23” is associated with a symbol group H (special electric operation symbol). In the case of small hits, the game state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electronic Chu support function) is not triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the lottery (each function Except when winning a small hit when the change is the end of the operation). When the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “1” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  Here, the game state control means 165 determines the game state after the special game and determines the game state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group related to the jackpot when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit. Switch. As the gaming state, the special symbol time reduction state and the electric chew support state are continued until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number of end conditions, for example, 50 times, counting from the end of the special game. However, when the state changes to the probable change state of the special symbol at the same time, as long as the probable change state continues, the short time state and the electric chew support state of the special symbol are also continued. That is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is continued until the next big hit. At this time, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the big win lottery probability is changed from a normal low probability to a high probability, and a high probability state advantageous to the normal gaming state is obtained. In the short time state of the special symbol, the average variation time of the special symbol is shortened. The electric chew support state (easy entry state) is activated by the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol changing time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory opening time extending function. This is a state where the ease of entering the ball is enhanced. When the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the normal symbol winning probability is increased from the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is reduced. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 67 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 67 is extended from the normal state.

In addition, the game state control means 165 can select a special game based on the type of the symbol groups A to G (the symbol group G is a symbol group related to the small hits not shown) when the result of the lottery is a big hit or a small hit. The subsequent variation pattern selection state is determined, and the variation pattern selection state after the special game is switched. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern table to be described later. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is when the special game ends or when the end number of times of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, there are a normal variation pattern selection state, a probability variation pattern selection state, a short-time variation pattern selection state, and the like as the variation pattern selection state. Here, the normal variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the normal variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state. The probability variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the probability variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. The short-time variation pattern selection state is a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to a short-time variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the special symbol time-short state. The gaming state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as “gaming state designation command”) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the lottery determination.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a special symbol variation pattern table. Here, (A1) and (A2) in the figure are normal fluctuation pattern tables, (B1) and (B2) in the figure are probability variation pattern tables, and (C1) and (C2) in the figure are short-time fluctuation pattern tables. It is. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of variation patterns. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a decision value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is determined for each variation pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and it is assumed that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of multiple symbols is also executed at the variation time. Is defined as Specifically, the variation patterns P1 and P2 have a variation time of 5 seconds and 10 seconds, respectively, and can take a non-reachable variation mode as a symbol variation process. The variation patterns P3 and P4 have a variation time of 20 seconds and 40 seconds, respectively, and can take a normal reach (N reach) variation mode as a symbol variation process. The variation patterns P5 and P6 have a variation time of 60 seconds and 90 seconds, respectively, can take a variation mode with reach as a variation process of symbols, and finally develop into super reach (SP reach). Here, in any variation pattern table, when the result of the lottery determination is a big hit, the non-reach variation patterns P1 and P2 are not selected, and only the variation patterns P3 to P6 with reach are selected. The On the other hand, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the selection rates of the non-reach fluctuation patterns P1 and P2 are relatively high. Here, compared with the normal fluctuation pattern table for loss, the selectivity of the non-reach fluctuation pattern P1 (change time: 5 seconds) is relative in the probability variation pattern table for loss and the short-time fluctuation pattern table for loss. Therefore, the average fluctuation time tends to be shortened. In this example, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns will be described as an example, but actually there are more than 100 types of variation patterns.

Further, in the above description, the variation pattern table for deviation is expressed by a single table in any case, but when the result of the lottery is lost, the number of reserved balls for special symbols ( Depending on 0-4), different variation pattern tables may be selected. That means
By using a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the higher the number of held balls, the higher the proportion of relatively short fluctuation times selected. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate at which a long variation time is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a big hit, using a variation pattern table corresponding to the symbol or symbol group related to the big hit, the expectation of the big hit is enhanced in a staged manner according to the type of the big hit. You may enable it to change the ratio from which a variation time is selected.

  Further, since the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol and then instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. Effect control command ("communication inspection command") for confirming whether or not, effect control command ("variation addition symbol information designation command" including variation addition symbol information (information for adding and subtracting variation time) ), An effect control command including variation pattern information (referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”), a “character effect number designation command” including character representation number information (design group and game state information), and the like. (Hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as “variation start command”), and this is a command of the main information storage means 180. And stores it in the pay area.

  The normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 includes a normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination unit 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148. When the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 reads the normal symbol random number value and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, They are stored in the normal symbol success / failure determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively.

  The normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146 reads out a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the determination of success / failure, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or miss. decide. The result of this lottery lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, it is cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to at the time of the success / failure lottery. In the normal state (low probability state), for example, the normal symbol hit / decision unit 146 Referring to the symbol winning / losing lottery table, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol, for example, referring to the normal symbol winning / losing lottery table with a probability of “282/283”, the normal symbol winning / losing lottery is executed. To do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a win, while assigning a predetermined off symbol when the result is wrong. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long variation time is selected (for example, seven types “4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds” are selected uniformly). On the other hand, a relatively short variation time (for example, “0.5 seconds”) is selected in the short time state (easy entry state) of the normal symbol.

When the result of the lottery determination is a big hit, the demonstration production setting means 150 determines the big hit start demonstration production and the big hit end demonstration displayed on the production display device 95 or the like during the special game according to the determined type of symbol group. The demonstration performance time related to the performance is determined. The demonstration effect setting means 150 also includes an effect control command (“hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of a jackpot start demonstration effect and effect control for instructing execution of a jackpot end demo effect as demo setting processing for the special game. Generate a command ("Big jack end demo command").

  Also, the demonstration performance time setting means 150 is a demonstration performance time related to the small hit start demonstration performance and the small hit end demonstration performance displayed on the production display device 95 or the like during the small hit game when the result of the lottery is a small hit. To decide. In addition, the demonstration effect setting means 150 performs an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect as demo setting processing for the small hit game. An instruction control command to be instructed (“small hit end demo command”) is generated.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 81 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 82 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 81 and the second special symbol display device 82 are monitored based on the special symbol game status in the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decoration symbol when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (that is, when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). An effect control command (referred to as “variation stop command”) is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 85 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and displays the normal symbol after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 85 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  If the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a big win, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 78 as a special game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The object 77 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 77 is defined as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds (in this example, 2R, 12R, 16R). . Here, when the big hit type is so-called 12R big hit (symbol group A, C) or 16R big hit (symbol group D), the big winning opening is opened for about 30 seconds at the maximum in one round game. On the other hand, when the big hit type is a so-called 2R big hit (symbol group B, E, F), the big winning opening is opened for about 0.05 seconds at the maximum in one round game.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 78 as a small hit game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The special electric accessory 77 is opened for a short period of time. The small hit game is composed of one round game, and is distinguished from a special game composed of a plurality of round games. Here, when the 2R special game and the small hit game described above are compared, although they are internally different, the point of the same opening / closing time (0.05 seconds) and the number of times of opening / closing are the same (the former is Since one opening and closing per round is twice in two rounds, and the latter is common in two opening and closing per round twice, a game with an approximate opening time / opening pattern is developed.

In addition, when the winning combination of normal symbols is won, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 68 to open the ordinary electric accessory 67 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 67 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, while it is normally electric in the easy entry state (electric chew support state). The accessory 67 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

  The error monitoring control unit 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command including the error information (“error effect designation command”) is requested to indicate an error state effect to the effect control board 200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the door opening switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set opening switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the back mechanism board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called goto action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores the obtained random number value information, information on the game state (probability change state, short time state, easy entry state) regarding the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, information on the variation pattern selection state, and result information on the pass / fail lottery (Hits, small hits, out of play), information on stop symbols and variation patterns related to special symbols and normal symbols, information on special games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of times released per round game), etc.), special It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of the symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 77, information on production control command data, and the like, and store each information. A predetermined storage area is provided.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of the MOD data is “1” to distinguish MODE and EVENT. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output to each of MODE and EVENT. In principle, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted for each interrupt period in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

《Direction control board》
As shown in FIG. 71, the effect control board 200 includes an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp control means 230, an accessory control means 240, an error effect control means 250, a sub main information storage means 260, a command. Transmitting / receiving means 270. Note that each of the above-described units in the effect control board 200 is configured by sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, hardware such as an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional representation of things.

The effect lottery random number generation unit 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. This software random number includes a pre-reading notice lottery random number for use in a pre-reading notice effect lottery, a pre-reading notice pattern random number used for selection of a pre-reading notice pattern, a decoration design random number used for selection of a stop pattern of a decoration design, and a decoration design. For example, a random effect pattern random number used for selecting a variable effect pattern, a notice effect pattern random number used for selecting a notice effect pattern, and the like. The update time of these random numbers is updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the production control side main process described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a decoration symbol determination means 224, a variable effect determination means 225, a notice effect determination means 226, and a big hit effect determination means 227. Including.

  The effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in accordance with the game state designation command from the main control board 100 and the consistency with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Execute. In the present embodiment, a normal effect mode, a probability change effect mode, and a time-saving effect mode are included as the three types of effect modes. The effect display device 95 displays an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image that is a back display of a decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode that is currently staying, and this background image is different for each effect mode. Since it is set, the player can recognize which effect mode he is currently staying in from the type of background image.

  The holding information display control means 222 includes a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol, have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball are based on the information of the operation holding ball number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. In addition, the hold information display control unit 222 applies the action hold ball of the first special symbol to the hold display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 95 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, when a special design operation holding ball is generated, a white display hold image is displayed. On the other hand, when a hold change pre-reading notice effect described below is executed, it becomes a target of a pre-reading notice. The reserved image is changed from a normal display mode (white) to a special display mode (blue, green, purple, red, etc. according to the degree of expectation of jackpot).

  The prefetch notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetch notice effect can be executed by lottery when the prior determination command is received from the main control board 100. The pre-read notice control unit 223 temporarily stores the information of the pre-determination result (pre-read information) included in the pre-determination command in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in a form combined with the order of entering the operation holding balls. . The pre-reading notice effect is generated as one aspect of a so-called continuous notice effect for notifying the possibility of occurrence of a big win or reach effect over a plurality of continuous display of decorative symbols. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, information on the pre-determining command from the main control board 100 (pre-judgment result) and information on the symbol memory number command (the number of currently operating suspended balls) are obtained. Analyzing, a pre-reading notice effect pattern over a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for an operation hold ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) that triggers the generation of this pre-reading notice effect. Note that there are various types of prefetching notice effects such as a pending change prefetching notice effect, a chance eye prefetching notice effect, and a background change prefetching notice effect.

The decorative design determining means 224 is configured to combine the final stop symbols of the decorative symbols (the left symbol, the middle symbol, the character symbol) based on information (variation pattern information, character production number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. The left symbol is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol sequences including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative design is formed by, for example, an identification element made up of numbers or letters. In this example, 12 types such as numbers “1” to “9”, characters “A”, “B”, and “C” are set as identification elements. Each decoration pattern is displayed in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →. Display the patrol at Z3. In this example, as a combination of decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), even-numbered decorative symbols are treated as non-probabilistic symbols that normally generate big hits, while odd-numbered and character decorative symbols are probable big hits. It is treated as a probable variation pattern.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plural types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, when the result of the winning / failing lottery corresponds to a big hit, a specific combination such as “7 · 7 · 7” or “1 · 1 · 1” Thus, a combination of three symbols is selected. In the case where the lottery result is 2R big hit or small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as “3 · 5 · 7” is selected. That is, the specific combination of 2R big hit or small hit does not necessarily have to be a combination of three symbols. If the lottery result is out of reach, for example, “3 ・ 4 ・ 3” or “7 ・ 5 ・ 7”, the left symbol and the right symbol match, and only the middle symbol is A frame-shifted combination is selected. In addition, when it is a small hit or 2R big hit, it is good also as a mode of said reach deviation. On the other hand, when the lottery result is out of reach, a combination (so-called “break”) in which three symbols are not aligned, such as “3, 1, 2” and “9, 4, 6” is selected. In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific outcome called a so-called “chance” may be selected. Furthermore, when performing an effect of temporarily stopping before final display of the final stop symbol as described above, the temporary stop symbol is selected.

  Based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation effect determining means 225 defines the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Determine the production pattern. The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol is selected from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Is selected. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, while the basic pattern (for example, “N reach A”, “SP reach A”, etc.) of the symbol variation is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, the variation control pattern is provided on the effect control substrate 200 side. Based on the basic pattern, a detailed pattern of design fluctuation (for example, “N reach A1, A2, A3”, “SP reach A1, A2, A3, A4”, etc.) that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In this way, the variation display pattern of the decorative design defines a variation display mode of the decorative design, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation of the decorative design to the end of the variation. The timing for generating the notice effect at the stage is also defined as a time schedule. Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern. In this embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if it is a variation effect pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and if it is a specific variation effect pattern, the left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stopping order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation degree tends to be relatively high.

The notice effect determining means 226 determines the notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that is executed at each stage of the decorative symbol change process according to the scenario of the change effect pattern described above. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character or motif, an animation, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating the effect device, or the like. . The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol and suggests in advance that the jackpot reliability that the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode is high. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each of the announcement effects has different jackpot reliability. Basically, the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of reach is relatively higher than the announcement effect displayed before the reach occurs. It has become. The notice effect determining means 226 maintains a notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern for each type of the notice effect, and according to the type of the notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. A notice effect pattern table is selected. The notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and, based on the notice effect pattern random number value obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, draws a lot of kinds of notice effect patterns. Choose one. In addition, as a kind of specific notice effect pattern, a comment notice effect pattern, a background notice effect pattern, an SU (step-up) notice effect pattern, a group notice effect pattern, a cut-in notice effect pattern, an accessory movable notice effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This notice effect is basically performed by combining the display of one or more notice effects with the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 95. For this reason, even in the case of decorative display variation display using the same variation production pattern, various production modes can be generated by combining with one or a plurality of notice productions.

  The jackpot effect determining means 227 is based on the jackpot effect demo time information from the main control board 100, and includes a special game effect including a jackpot start demonstration and a jackpot end demo displayed during the special game prior to the execution of the special game ( Determine the content of the jackpot game production). Further, when the big hit effect determining means 227 receives the hit start demonstration effect command or the hit end demonstration effect command from the main control board 100, according to the content of the determined special game effect, Controls the effect processing of the hit end demonstration effect.

  As described above, the production supervision unit 220 generates the image control command related to the image and the sound based on the decided production content (variation production pattern, notice production pattern, stop symbol pattern, etc.), and the sub-main information storage unit 260 Store in the command storage area.

  The lamp effect control unit 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect contents set by the effect control unit 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10, the panel lamp 25), and the lamp according to the determined effect pattern. Data is read, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 291.

  The accessory effect control means 240 controls the drive of each effect device according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The accessory effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the effect device, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 292.

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100 and to notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. Yes.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decoration symbol information, variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and a predetermined number for storing each information. A storage area is provided. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300 ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interruption based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes an effect control command reception interrupt process (details will be described later). In this interrupt process, various effect control commands are sent. To get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the effect control command reception interrupt process preferentially over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level less than 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 stores in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative symbol information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The image control command thus transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 95 to variably display the effect image including the decorative design according to the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in a manner superimposed on the design variation effect at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

[Process on the main control board]
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
75 to 76 are flowcharts showing the main process on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main process on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by reset at power-on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of a program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in a built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

Here, when the information indicating that the power is off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it has been backed up normally, Sam becomes “0”. In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power interruption. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 95, initialize the effect lamp LP, etc., an effect control command (“effect initial command”) is requested to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, power-on normal information setting, various error initial settings, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was correctly turned on, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the occurrence of power-off is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, a data transfer source address, a data transfer destination address, and a transfer byte number are set, and data corresponding to the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, a special symbol game status value at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power failure return command”) at the time of power failure recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power-off recovery command includes information related to the inspection of the communication line, the special symbol operating state, the probability variation count, the time reduction count, the easy-to-enter state count, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. It should be noted that the command requests for untransmitted before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information on the number of suspended balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of suspended balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the ordinary electric accessory 67 to a state before the power is cut off (for example, the second start port 65 is opened) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 77 to the state before the power is cut off (for example, the special winning opening 64 is opened) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start a timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of a power interruption, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred (S23). If no power interruption has occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

Next, interrupt permission is set so as to allow the generation of the timer interrupt process (S25), the process returns to the above-described process for prohibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop process of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but using the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process until the next interrupt process occurs, S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if a power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described below.

  Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the power-on normal information is not found (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control timer interrupt processing》
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the main process on the main control side. In addition, as the terms used below, the terms “condition device” and “actual accessory continuous actuating device” mean a conceptual control device, and “condition device” means a big hit in a special symbol game. The “actual accessory continuous actuating device” is capable of operating the special electric accessory 77 a plurality of times in succession.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then an interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, a clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written in the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset time-out period, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start opening switch 61, the second start opening switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, the big prize opening switch 76, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. Is read, and after the state is determined, the detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In these various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. When the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, initial value update type random number update processing is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the soft random numbers per special symbol, and the symbol random numbers per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. Further, when the counter value makes one round, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include special symbol game timers for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72.

  Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second start port effective period setting process, a winning effective period and a winning invalid period of the second start port 65 are determined, and effective period data or invalid period data of the second start port 65 is set as a determination result.

  Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In the winning monitoring process, the game ball switch passage inspection is performed based on the detection information of the first starting port switch 61, the second starting port switch 66, the operation gate switch 71, and the big winning port switch 76 in the input process (S53). As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the number of prize balls is stored and a request for sending out a payout control command is made.

  Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored to pay out the payout control board 400. Perform communication inspection with.

  Next, normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 70 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 70, the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation holding ball information. In addition to updating the number of suspended balls for a maximum of 4 balls, random numbers related to normal symbol lottery are stored.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 85 or the ordinary electric accessory 67 is performed, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol display process, depending on the value of the normal symbol game status The processing during normal electric accessory operation, the processing during normal electric accessory operation end demonstration, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) so that the normal symbol is variably displayed or fixedly displayed.

Next, normal symbol variation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, when the normal symbol operation state is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol operation holding ball number is digested by one, and the normal symbol variation is monitored. Determination of success / failure, determination of design, determination of variation pattern, setting of variation time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winnings of the game balls to the first start port 60 and the second start port 65 are monitored, and when there is a winning game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. Random number storage, prefetching notice effect determination, command memory number command request, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420) and a special symbol variation process (S430) which will be described later in detail. ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 77, the operation start and end setting of the special electric accessory 77, large Update of the opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 64, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, the command request of the demonstration effect, etc. are executed in order.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 64 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is digested, and a command request for the number of stored symbols, whether the special symbol is successful or not is determined. The determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration performance time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

  Next, an entrance passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the incoming ball passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error” A request for a production designation command ") and a request for outputting a security signal for output to an external terminal are made.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times that the special electric accessory 77 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, a handle state signal inspection process is executed (S72). In this handle state signal inspection process, the touch state of the firing handle 12 is monitored based on the detection information from the touch sensor of the firing handle 12, and an effect control command (handle state effect command) is issued based on the monitoring result. Generate.

  Next, an LED output process is executed (S73). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times that the special electric accessory is operated continuously, display an error, etc. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are used as the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 85, the special symbol hold lamps 73 and 74, and the general figure hold. In addition to outputting to the lamp 86, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S74). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a fire permission signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the game ball is allowed to be launched. To do. On the other hand, when an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

  Next, a test signal output process is executed (S75). In this test signal output process, various test signals indicating the operating state of the gaming machine are created and output to an external testing device in a performance confirmation test for determining whether or not the gaming machine is appropriate.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S76). In this solenoid output process, in the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) to operate each electric accessory 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S77). In the effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the process described above. The control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S78). In the external information output process, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set in an interrupt enabled state (S79). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power-off (a decrease in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control-side main process or interrupt process, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power-off confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original process, the above-described power-off process (S
26 to S32).

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is applicable.

(Start-up port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a game winning at the first start port 60 has been detected (S201). When a winning at the first start port 60 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

  When the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), as a lottery random value for the first special symbol game, a random value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S203). Then, as the update of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 60 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game winning at the second starting port 65 is detected (S205). When a winning at the second starting port 65 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol, as a lottery random value related to the second special symbol game Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S207). Then, as the update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 65 is finished.

  Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. Is determined (S209). When there is an update of the number of balls with an operating reserve (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of balls with an operating reserve of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is stored as main information storage means. The command is stored in the command storage area 180 (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a pre-determination timing of the pre-reading notice effect (S211). As described above, the pre-determination timing is (1) waiting per hit, and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting per hit, and In the case where the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, (3) any of the cases in which the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit When you are satisfied. If it is a prior determination timing (S211: YES), a random number value per special symbol is read from the random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and a prior determination is made (S212). Then, a validity determination command including this determination result information (notice number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

  Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and symbol preliminary determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including this determination result information (notice number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the variation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including information on the determination result (notice number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68), a special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process to be described later is applied to the special symbol side satisfying the fluctuation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both “00H (waiting for change)”. It is determined whether or not (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls in the second special symbol is “0” (S303). If the number of retained balls is not “0” (S303: NO), the second special symbol is determined. It is assumed that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and after setting the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) Then, the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. Digested.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is “0” (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is “0” (S305). . If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is assumed that the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (hereinafter referred to as “the first special symbol variation start monitoring table”). After setting the addresses of the various tables used in the processing and the addresses of the RAM storage area (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  Note that if the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310), the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above is referred to The special symbol side process will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so the first special symbol side process is the exception unless otherwise specified. Whether or not there is a process on the second special symbol side will be described as a group without distinction.

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the subject of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol memory number command including information on the number of suspended balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the side of the special symbol subject to the start of the current change is accessed, and the random number value per special symbol and the special symbol stored in the first reserved storage area (holding 1 storage area) In order to sequentially read the design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value, and use these random number values for the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later, Transfer to the special symbol success / failure determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, a special symbol success / failure determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), first, a special symbol success / failure lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is a special symbol probability changing state, a high-probability lottery table is obtained, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a low-probability lottery table is obtained. Next, a random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, referring to the special symbol success / failure lottery table, the special symbol success / failure determination is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, values corresponding to the determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), a special symbol stop symbol, a symbol group type, and a character effect number (variable added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the determination. Then, the special symbol stop symbol, the symbol group type, and the character effect number determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The character effect number includes the determined symbol group type (eight patterns of symbol groups A to L) and the operation status of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (special symbol probability change on / special symbol probability change off). Any one of 32 patterns in total is determined on the basis of a combination of (4 patterns of normal symbol probability variation ON / normal symbol probability variation OFF). If the result of the determination is wrong, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (S341), and whether or not the result of the determination is a big win (S342). If the result of the determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the determination is out of order (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), the special symbol is displayed as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group determined in S333 (the jackpot type). It is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, when the symbol group type (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to provide a probability variation function, and when the symbol group type indicates a normal symbol, the probability variation Decide not to give the function. This determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Further, based on the symbol group type (big hit type) determined in S333, the number of times of operation of the variable time reduction function is determined as the gaming state after the special game (S344), and the number of times of operation of the electric support function is determined. (S345). This determination result (the operation time information of the variation time shortening function, the operation frequency information of the electric chew support function) is stored in the time information storage area and the easy-to-enter number storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

Subsequently, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 77 is set based on the symbol group type (big hit type) determined in S333 (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 77, the specified number of round games (in this example, 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 2 rounds,
Round), a maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 (in this example, 30 seconds, 0.05 seconds) and the like are set.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S333 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S333, the demonstration performance time (the hit start demo time and the hit end demo time) of the special game or the small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol success / failure determination region and the special symbol / symbol determination region of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-described special symbol success / failure determination processing (S320) and symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from “00H (standby)” to “01H (change start)” (S350).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is not in operation, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “00H (waiting for winning)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  When the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. The addresses of the various tables and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (standby)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 described above is used, and the special subject to change this time is used. The process on the symbol side will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so is it the process on the first special symbol side unless otherwise specified? A description will be given collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is on the second special symbol side.

(Special design control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is executed to shift to processing according to the special symbol game status values ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not “00H” (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “01H (change start)” (S412). If the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol variation start process (S420). In the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changed)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is “03H” (S414: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

(Special symbol variation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the lottery determination and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a special symbol variation start setting, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the change start command, in order to start the inspection of the communication line and the effect display between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200, a communication check command, a change additional symbol information specifying command, a change pattern specifying command, a character effect number specifying command Are created in order and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “01H (change start)” to “02H (change)” (S428).

(Special symbol change processing)
Next, the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol variable display (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), special pattern display pattern number data is generated for each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 in the LED output process (S73) so as to display the variable special symbols in a variable manner or in a definite manner.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is completed (S432: YES), a special symbol stop symbol to be fixedly displayed on the first special symbol display device 81 or the second special symbol display device 82 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decoration symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, “500 (ms)” is stored in the special symbol game timer as a fixed display time (S435). Note that the “determined display time” is a time for definitely stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is suspended. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “02H (fluctuating)” to “03H (stopping symbol display)” (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. 85 to 86 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). When the special symbol fixed display time is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stopped symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). When the hit / decision determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability variation function is deactivated (S444), the special symbol variation time reduction function is deactivated (S445), and the electric support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, “00H (not actuated)” is set in the special symbol mode flag, and “00H” is set in the time reduction number counter and the easy-to-enter number counter to clear to zero.

  Next, as a special game hit start demo setting process, a hit start demo display time is set, and an effect control command (hit start demo command) for instructing start of a hit start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “01H (special game)” (S449). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, if the determination data is not big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). When the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time-count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the hourly number counter is zero (S457: YES), the special symbol variable time reduction function is deactivated, assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time-short state has been reached (S458). If the time-count counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the easy-to-enter state counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the digest of the number of changes in the special symbol this time (step S460). . Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy entry state number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the end number of easy entry states has been reached. If the easy-to-enter state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number. If it has been reached, the state is switched to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-described S451 to S464 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). On the side of the production control board 200, the production mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data “33H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as the hit start demo setting process of the small hit game, the hit start demo display time is set and the effect control command for instructing the start of the hit start demo effect is given. Is generated (S467). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “02H (small winning game)” (S468). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, if the small symbol data “33H” is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, if the shift data “00H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469 are executed. skip. Note that when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the process of clearing the contents of the flag was not performed because “00H” was originally stored as outlier data.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 87 to 89 are flowcharts showing details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “01H (special game)” (S501). If the special electric accessory game status is “01H” (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started in each round game.

  When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 77 (S503: YES), the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started (S504), and the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is performed as S505 to S509. Execute the process.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 77, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls has been won in the grand prize opening 64 (S505), and the operation time (opening time) of the special electric accessory 77 is determined. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S506). At this time, when the maximum number of game balls has been won in the big prize opening 64 (S505: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 77 has elapsed (S506: YES), the special electric accessory 77 The operation is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S508). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S508: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 is incremented by 1 (S509).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 77 has reached the specified number of rounds (S508: YES), the process proceeds to S510, and the winning end demonstration display time is set as the winning end demonstration setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the hit end demo effect is generated (S510).

  Subsequently, the variable time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S511). Further, the easy entry state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy entry state number counter (S512).

  Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S513). When the condition device is activated by a specific symbol (S513: YES), the operation time data “7FH” is stored in the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol probability variation function is activated. (S514). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S513: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability variation counter, and S514 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction number counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S515). If it is the variation time shortening function operation data (S515: YES), the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function is started (S516). On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S515: NO), S516 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy entry state number information stored in the easy entry state number counter is electric Chu support function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S517). If it is the electric chew support function operation data (S517: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S518 to S520). That is, the operation start of the normal symbol probability variation function (S518), the operation start of the normal symbol variation time reduction function (S519), and the operation start of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 67 (S520) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric Chu support function operation data, S518 to S520 are skipped.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S521). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in the above-described S511 to S521 is generated and stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S522). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S523).

  On the other hand, when the special electric accessory game status is not “01H (special game)” (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530 and whether the special electric accessory game status is “02H (small hit game)”. It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is “02H” (S530: YES), the small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 77 is in operation (S531). When the special electric accessory 77 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric accessory 77 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 77 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 77, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls has been won at the big prize opening 64 (S533), and the operation time of the special electric accessory 77 (opened). It is determined whether or not (time) has elapsed (S534). At this time, when the game ball has won the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening 64 (S533: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 77 has elapsed (S534: YES), the special electric accessory 77 The operation is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, as the hit end demo setting process for the small hit game, the hit end demo display time is set and an effect control command (hit end demo command) for instructing start of the hit end demo effect is generated (S536). Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S537). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S538). This gaming state designation command is used on the side of the production control board 200 for determining the production mode transition trigger, specifying the migration destination production mode, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S538).

[Processing on the production control board side]
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 includes a reset start process (including an effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after power-on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. Ramp activated when triggered by the arrival of a predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the process, the reception control process of the effect control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It includes an effect interruption process, an image control command transmission interruption process activated at regular intervals, and an ACK command reception interruption process activated upon receipt of an ACK command. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but actually other interrupt processing also exists.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occurs is set. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram for explaining the priority level of interrupt processing. In this example, “reset start processing by power reset (FIG. 90): top priority”, “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities (FIG. 90): top priority” → “production control command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 97): Level 7 ”→“ Reset start processing by WDT (during runaway detection) (FIG. 90): Level 3 ”→“ Image control command transmission interrupt processing: Level 2 ”,“ ACK command reception interrupt processing: Level 2 ”→“ The priority levels are ranked in the order of production control timer interruption processing (FIG. 98): level 1 ”,“ lamp production interruption processing (FIG. 95): level 1 ”, and the like. Note that the “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” is, for example, when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or by an illegal method, and during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer It starts when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but actually other interrupt processing also exists.

In the effect control side main process, the process is basically performed after setting all interrupts to be prohibited or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt being set. Then, when the production control side main process is in an interrupt-permitted state, each interrupt process is started in a manner that interrupts the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during execution of the interrupt process (a multiple interrupt occurs), if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, in principle While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. That is, each interrupt process is advanced in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are prohibited. Then, each interrupt process returns to the production control side main process with all interrupts permitted. Note that the priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. In this reset start processing, after the power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormal times, or reset caused by WDT (during runaway detection), the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. The program starts and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as basic settings related to hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by zero clear is performed for a variable without an initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the production control command reception interrupt process are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process for setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Furthermore, a turn-off request is made to turn off the effect lamp LP (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

  Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). Details of the effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that when the process shifts to the production control side main process in S609, it is not normally possible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. Shifts to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is lower than that during normal operation (S610).

《Direction control side main processing》
Next, the production control side main process (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

  First, an address (start address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the production control side main process is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, a device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). In order to control the operation of each rendering device by a device such as a motor or solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming necessary position information. At the end of the initialization operation, each rendering device returns to a preset initial position (reference position). In addition to each effect device (movable accessory), an output of a reset signal (electric signal) or a reset command (command information) is issued to the image control means (sub-sub CPU) to reset the display of the image display device or the like. Send. In the case of power-on after a power failure occurs during decorative symbol display, an image control command that only displays the decorative symbol is output after the reset signal (or reset command) is output. The effect performed in addition to the variable display of the decorative design is not executed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent a time shift or the like of the effect display from occurring due to a time difference until each control board completes processing related to start-up after power-off.

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, so that the watchdog timer Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, the off symbol update process is executed (S615). In this missed symbol update process, the missed symbol counter set in the RAM 203 is updated. The missed symbol counter is a loop counter for determining a missed symbol combination of decorative symbols, and for example, increments from “111” to “999” one by one and circulates. In this example, since all combinations of decorative symbols (big hit symbols, small hit symbols, reach missed symbols, non-reach missed symbols, etc.) are determined by random number lottery, this processing is not actually performed.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S616). In this input port check process, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S712 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, four times). When the input port states are all “1”, the signal level is “1 (H level)”, when all the input ports are “0”, the signal level is “0 (L level)”, otherwise the signal level is set. Do not change (this determines the input signal). The I / O port circuit 204 monitors input information such as a detection signal of a position detection sensor of each effect device and an abnormality monitoring signal, and outputs or operates a drive signal (drive data described later) to each effect device. It has a function of transmitting a control command.

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S617). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S621). Here, when a lamp effect number is set in the command analysis process (S621) in order to perform an error notification lamp effect that is an aspect of the error effect (when there is a lamp request), the lamp corresponding to this lamp effect number is set. The pattern data is specified, and the error notification lamp effect is started. In the lamp pattern data, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In addition, a layer (detailed later) is set in the lamp pattern data in accordance with the type of lamp effect. Further, in the error presentation management process, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is subtracted and updated every 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S720) of the production control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the effect lamp LP is turned off and the error effect is ended.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S618). In this effect button monitoring control process, when a button notice effect is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 10 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset values are set in accordance with the button notice effect. The content of the production according to the input state of the production button 10 is determined from the types of production content.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S619). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern (which defines the contents of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative symbol change process in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S621) ( The notice performance number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Also, an image control command for designating the notice effect number to the image control board 300 side is generated. At this time, when an accessory notice effect pattern (an accessory notice effect number) is selected as the notice effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the effect device is driven in the subsequent device management process (S620). A pattern is identified. In this example, not all of the multiple types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative symbol are drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop process efficiency is improved. Therefore, a lottery is performed across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each time of occurrence of a notice effect (for example, a fluctuation start stage, a reach generation stage, and a fluctuation stop stage). At that time, the notice effect that occurs at the beginning of the decorative symbol change stage needs to be synchronized with the start of the decorative symbol change (send the image control command immediately). To do. When a notice effect pattern is selected in the notice lottery management process, an image control command for instructing the notice effect number is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. . Specifically, a command set function “function name: CmdSet” for non-interrupt is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

  Next, device management processing is executed (S620). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices, an effect number (lamp effect) is selected from a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203. The pattern data corresponding to the number, the accessory announcement effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with every frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this lamp pattern data, a layer (detailed later) is set according to the type of lamp effect. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 95. Similarly, drive data associated with each interruption cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data in the drive pattern data of the rendering device. As a result, control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in an effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interruption process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the effect device is stopped. End device control.

In this example, normal lamp effects (managed by this process), premier lamp effects (managed by this process), and error notification lamp effects (managed by the above error effect management process) are prepared as types of lamp effects. A layer (layer number) is set according to the type of each lamp effect. The layer number indicates the priority order according to the type of lamp effect, and in the descending order of priority, the error notification lamp effect (layer number 3)> premier lamp effect (layer number 2)> normal lamp effect (layer number 1) ). In this device management process, when two or more lamp requests are at the same time or at different timings, the corresponding lamp patterns are specified regardless of the layer number and internally based on all the lamp patterns. Control is to be executed. The normal lamp effect, the premier lamp effect, and the error notification lamp effect are different from each other in the lighting mode of the effect lamp LP. Although detailed description is omitted, in the device management process (S620), the sound data output control for the speaker 8 is also performed according to the sound pattern data associated with each frame time in the same manner as the lamp pattern data. The control of the speaker 8 starts and ends.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S621) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the effect control command that has been read out is read out. The effect control process corresponding to the type is executed. Details of this command analysis processing (S621) will be described later with reference to FIG. This command analysis process (S621) can execute analysis of a plurality of effect control commands in one main loop, and can perform effect control in the command storage area when it can be processed within one frame time (16 ms). Parses commands sequentially. If there is no effect control command in the command storage area, the process waits or an effect lottery random number update process (S623) described later is executed.

  Then, it is determined whether command analysis (effect control command analysis) has been executed during the current loop processing (S622). If it is immediately after command analysis (S622: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S622: NO), the effect lottery random number update process is executed (S623). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative design random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing (S621) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis processing (S621). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and an effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process for changing the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related commands include a symbol memory number command and a prior determination command. When this symbol storage number command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In the hold information management process (S634), a symbol storage number command or a pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and a display mode of a hold image displayed on the hold display units 701 and 702 of the effect display device 95 ( A process for updating the display number) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the effect content determination process (S636). In this effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. In this case, a process for ending the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. Details of the effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the hit effect related commands include a hit start demonstration effect command and a hit end demo effect command. When the winning effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the hit effect display setting process (S638) of the big hit effect and the small hit effect. In the hit effect display setting process (S638), a process for executing a big hit start demo effect (small hit start demo effect) or a big hit end demo effect (small hit end demo effect) is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). If this error effect designation command is stored (S639: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S640). In this error effect content determination process (S640), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and an error effect pattern for notifying the error state is determined by image display on the effect display device 95. Details of the error effect content determination process (S640) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If no effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO), command analysis is performed without doing anything. Even when the processing is finished and the analysis of a certain production control command is completed, if other production control commands remain in the command storage area, repeat the others until the predetermined processable limit timing is reached. Analysis for the remaining presentation control commands is executed.

(Production content determination process)
Next, the effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing details of the effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S641). If a variation start command is stored (S641: YES), the contents of this variation start command (variation pattern designation command, variation additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and the contents of this command are analyzed. As a result of the winning / losing lottery included, information indicating a symbol group, a variation pattern (variation time), a gaming state, and the like is acquired (S642). This acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Also, as a change start command, a special symbol success / failure designation command including information indicating the result of the special symbol game's success / failure lottery, and a special symbol stop symbol group designation command including information indicating the result of the special symbol game's symbol lottery from the main CPU. Information received in the contents of this command may be acquired.

Subsequently, a variation effect pattern selection process is executed (S643). In this variation effect pattern selection process, a variation effect pattern table is acquired based on the variation pattern information acquired in S642, and a variation effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generator 210 to obtain a plurality of types of variation effects. One of the variation production patterns is determined by lottery from the patterns. Fluctuation effect patterns are: decorative pattern change mode, reach effect type / occurrence time, notice effect type / occurrence time, lamp effect interrupt timing (start timing of lamp effect interrupt processing), sound effect (BGM or sound effect) The output display process, the operation timing of the movable effect member, and the like are configured. The variable effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

Next, a ramp request function “function name: RampReq” for outside the interrupt is called to execute ramp request processing (S644). Here, FIG. 96 (A) is a flowchart showing details of the lamp request processing outside the interrupt (S644). In the present embodiment, “function” refers to a subroutine obtained by modularizing one or a plurality of processes and executed by a call instruction or the like.

  In this lamp request process, first, interrupt processes other than the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 100 are prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the variable effect pattern number is read from the variable effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the variable effect pattern number is requested (S663). The lamp effects selected in this process include a normal lamp effect selected at a normal frequency and a premier lamp effect selected at a relatively low frequency compared to the normal lamp effect. This premier lamp effect is a special effect that suggests, for example, the determination of winning a big hit. Next, the lamp effect number requested in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S664). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) for the effect lamp LP, and the processing proceeds. In this example, a plurality of lamp request storage areas are prepared, and a plurality of lamp effect numbers can be set. When a plurality of lamp effect numbers are set (when there are a plurality of lamp requests), the layer process is executed in such a manner that only a lamp effect with a high priority is visible to the player, and a lamp with a low priority As for the production, only the process is advanced internally (details will be described later). Then, all interrupts are permitted (S665), the ramp request process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process in the main process.

  Next, returning to FIG. 93, a decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S645). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S642, the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is selected by lottery. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  Then, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start decoration pattern variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S646). Specifically, a command set function “function name: CmdSet” for non-interrupt is called, and a process (command set process) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S641: NO), it is determined whether or not the change stop command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S647). When the variable stop command is stored (S647: YES), the contents of the variable stop command are analyzed, and the symbol stop information included in the contents of this command is acquired (S648). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the decoration symbol variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S649). Specifically, a command set function “function name: CmdSet” for non-interrupt is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

(Error production content determination process)
Next, the error effect content determination process (S640) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing details of the error effect content determination process (S640).

  First, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S651). If an error effect designation command is stored (S651: YES), the contents of the error effect designation command are analyzed, and information indicating an error state included in the contents of the command is acquired (S652). This acquired information is stored in the error state determination area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  Subsequently, an error effect pattern selection process is executed (S653). In this error effect pattern selection process, an error effect pattern is determined based on the error state information acquired in S652. In the error effect pattern, information such as an error notification image (for example, a message that an error has occurred), a warning sound by a speaker, and an error notification lighting pattern by an effect lamp are defined. The error effect pattern data determined here is temporarily stored in the error effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. When an error effect pattern is set, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer in the error effect management process (S617), and error effect management is started. The error management timer is updated by an error management timer update process (S720) described later.

Next, a ramp request function “function name: RampReq” for outside the interrupt is called to execute a ramp request process (S654). FIG. 96A is a flowchart showing the details of the lamp request processing outside the interrupt (S654). The ramp request function “RampReq” called in this process is the same as the ramp request function “RampReq” called in the ramp request process (S644) in the above-described effect content determination process (S636). That is, the lamp request process shown in FIG. 96A is a subroutine common to the effect content determination process (S636) and the error effect content determination process (S640). Therefore, in the main process, the lamp request process (S644, S654) is performed by one common module. In the ramp request function “RampReq”, all interrupts (except for the production control command reception interrupt processing) are prohibited at the start of processing, and all interrupts are permitted at the end of processing. This is to prevent a failure (for example, a failure that makes the status management complicated) due to the activation of an interrupt process (a lamp effect interrupt process described later) and the generation of a plurality of lamp requests at the same time.

  In this lamp request process, first, interrupt processes other than the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 100 are prohibited (S661). Subsequently, the error effect pattern number is read from the error effect pattern storage area (S662). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the error effect pattern number is requested (S663). In this process, only an error notification lamp effect for notifying an error state of the gaming machine is requested. Next, the lamp effect number selected in S663 is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S664). Then, all interrupts are permitted (S665), the ramp request process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process in the main process.

  Subsequently, returning to FIG. 94, an image control command (error production start command) required for error production is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S655). Specifically, a command set function “function name: CmdSet” for non-interrupt is called to perform processing (command set processing) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer.

In this embodiment, not all lamp requests are performed in the main process (command analysis process) described above, but a lamp effect interrupt process is activated at a predetermined opportunity to perform a lamp request. That is, in the time schedule of the variation effect pattern selected in S643, the occurrence timing (interrupt timing) of the lamp effect interrupt process is defined in relation to the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decoration effect change effect process. ing. When this interrupt timing arrives, a lamp effect interrupt process is activated to execute a process for requesting a lamp effect number. Note that the occurrence timing of the lamp effect interruption process is synchronized with the occurrence timing of a specific notice effect (for example, when a lamp of a color associated with the notice effect content is turned on).

《Lamp effect interrupt processing》
Next, the lamp effect interruption process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing lamp effect interruption processing. This lamp effect interrupt process is generated by a software interrupt when the interrupt timing defined in the variable effect pattern arrives.

First, in the lamp effect interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt are permitted (S671). Subsequently, the ramp request function “function name: RampReq_InINT” for the interrupt is called to execute the ramp request processing (S672). FIG. 96 (B) is a flowchart showing the lamp request process for interrupt (S672). This ramp request function (RampReq_InINT) is different from the ramp request function “RampReq” called in the main process described above in that no interrupt disable / permit instruction is set at the beginning and end of the process. As described above, in each interrupt processing, the generation of other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level is prohibited, so that another ramp request occurs during this ramp request processing. Because there is no.

  In this lamp request process, the notice effect pattern is read with reference to the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S681). Then, a lamp effect number corresponding to the notice effect pattern is requested (S682). For example, if the notice effect is a background notice and a notice effect pattern that displays a blue background is selected in the notice lottery management process, a lamp effect (lamp effect number) for lighting the effect lamp LP in blue is selected. ) Is requested. Subsequently, the lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S683). Therefore, in the subsequent processing, when a numerical value other than 0 is set in the lamp request storage area, it is determined that there is an operation request (lamp request) for the effect lamp LP, and the processing proceeds. Then, the lamp effect interruption process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interruption.

《Reception interrupt processing of production control command》
Next, the reception control process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing reception control processing for a production control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like that. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is generated, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is confirmed (S701). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not finalized until the same value is read twice.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether the command is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S702). If the command received this time is the first command (S702: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S703). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S704). Note that the production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received. The production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing, such as when a game ball starts winning or when a special symbol changes. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity from being obtained at the acquisition time by using it as an opportunity. In this way, by making the production lottery random number acquisition time irregular, it is difficult to cause inconveniences such as the same production being unnaturally repeated in various production lotteries.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S705: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (writing pointer) is acquired (S706). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the light pointer (S707). The saved command data is read in the command analysis process (S621) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S708). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S708 is cleared (S709).

《Timer interrupt processing for production control side》
Next, the production control side timer interruption process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing effect control side timer interruption processing. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-described production control side main process.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processing from S711 onward is sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S711).

Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S712). In this port input / output processing, port data input processing and output processing in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port). In the I / O port circuit 204, an input port is provided for receiving a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 450 has dropped below a predetermined value. When a power-off signal is input, processing for saving various data at the time of power-off occurrence in the backup area of the RAM 203 is performed as power-off processing. Thereafter, since backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit of the power supply board 450, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are retained without being lost even after the power is turned off. In addition, as other power-off processing, the motor M that is the drive source of each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right effect device 800, and lower effect device 900). Is turned off (non-energized state), the operation of each rendering device in an unstable state where power is cut off is interrupted early, and the initial operation can be performed without any abnormality after the power is turned off. It should be noted that the stop position of each rendering device is held with the detent torque during non-energization.

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S713). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data can be switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data. Details of the device control data output process (S713) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, effect timer update processing is executed (S714). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated every interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like. By this effect timer, the time schedule in the variable effect pattern is managed, and time management such as the drive timing of the motor M of each effect device and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S713) and the lamp data update process (S717) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S715). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 10 is updated by subtracting the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 10 is valid.

  Next, an image control command setting process is executed (S716). In the image control command setting process, one or more selected in the notice lottery management process (S619) when the occurrence timing of the notice effect comes in the effect timer in the effect timer update process (S714). When a specific notice effect pattern is included in the previous notice effect pattern, an image control command for instructing the specific notice effect number is generated and stored in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260. Set to. Specifically, a command set function “function name: CmdSet_InINT” for an interrupt is called to perform a process (command set process) for setting an image control command in the image control command buffer. Here, for the specific notice effect pattern, for example, an effect pattern in which an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 95 when the effect button 10 is pressed, or an effect image is displayed in accordance with the operation of each effect device. Includes patterns.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, it is incremented by 1. If the value of the task counter is “15”, it is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a circulation period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the task counter value updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S718) and runaway monitoring are performed according to the task counter value. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values with an interval of 8 ms between each other) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to the task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to make it coincide with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S718). In the lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S620) or the error effect management process (S617). The lamp data set in this processing is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of the effect lamp LP switching control. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 291 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit 205. The serial communication circuit 205 serially converts the ramp data in the transmission buffer in units of 1 byte, and outputs the converted data to the lamp connection board 291 for each bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 291 by serial transfer. This ramp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (S717) (that is, executed at a cycle of 16 ms). Processing).

  Here, as described above, in this embodiment, a layer corresponding to each lamp effect type (normal lamp effect, premier lamp effect, error notification lamp effect) is set, and a plurality of lamp requests having different types are set. If there is, only the ramp data set in the upper layer (high priority layer) is output, while the ramp data set in the lower layer (low priority layer) is prohibited from being output. However, since the ramp data switching process (switching process every 16 ms) itself is not stopped, when the process of the upper layer is completed, the lower layer process and the continuity are maintained. The lamp data set in the layer is output (the lamp effect relating to the lower layer is generated). In the lamp data update process (S718), in order to output only the lamp data related to the upper (highest priority) layer, when the lamp data related to a plurality of layers are superimposed, the lighting is generally not regular and uncomfortable. This is because there is a possibility of becoming a pattern. Also, the premier lamp effect is distinguished from the normal lamp effect by the layer structure, and the priority is different. Generally, the premier lamp effect has a lower appearance rate than the normal lamp effect, but the appearance timing is regular. Since it occurs at random timing and the appearance of the premier lamp effect selected later is reserved due to the presence of the normal lamp effect selected first, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the premier ramp effect This is because the feeling is diminished.

Subsequently, an image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S719). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is monitored. The sub-sub CPU 301 is determined to be out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

  Next, an error management timer update process is executed (S720). In this error management timer update process, the error effect timer value for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. This error management timer update process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S717). Therefore, even if the error production time becomes long, the time is counted by a timer with a 16 ms period, so the data amount is smaller than when counting the time every timer interruption period (1 ms). Can be reduced. Then, all interrupts are permitted and the saved register contents are restored. Then, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

(Device control data output processing)
Next, device control data output processing (S713) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing details of the device control data output process (S713).

  First, a sensor input check process is executed (S731). In this sensor input check process, each rendering device (upper rendering device 500, lower left side) is based on the input information of the position detection sensor stored in the port input / output processing (S712) at each timer interrupt cycle (1 ms). The state of all position detection sensors (initial position sensor, intermediate position sensor, and movable position sensor) in the rendering device 600, the upper left rendering device 700, the right rendering device 800, and the lower rendering device 900) is confirmed. At this time, for each movable effect member (drive motor) provided in each effect device, the detection state by each position detection sensor is held by a number.

  For example, “0” is set as the number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 (first upper effect member 571) of the upper effect device 500 are detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a. “1” is set as a number corresponding to a state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b. “2” is set as the number corresponding to the state in which the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c. That is, “0” is set as the number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the initial position sensor. “1” is set as the number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the intermediate position sensor. “2” is set as the number corresponding to the state in which the effect member is detected by the movable position sensor. For all position detection sensors in each effect device, “0” is set as the number when the position detection sensor is in the non-detection state, and “1” is set as the number when the position detection sensor is in the detection state. Based on the obtained data, the operation control of the movable effect member may be performed.

In this sensor input check process (S731), when it is confirmed that the position detection sensor has switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the effect member corresponding to the position detection sensor that has switched from the non-detection state to the detection state The counter value (the number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor that moves is reset. Specifically, when the sensor detection unit provided in the rendering device shields the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor, the current operation pattern (drive motor drive pattern data) detects the position of the counter value of the operation pulse. The counter value of the operation pulse is reset when it corresponds to the monitoring target pattern data for executing the correction based on the sensor. The reason for dividing the monitoring target pattern data from other data is to prevent the setting of the counter value of the operation pulse from being changed unnecessarily. As an example of the monitoring target pattern data, driving pattern data in the case where the effect member is repeatedly reciprocated can be cited. Although it is not the pattern data to be monitored by the position detection sensor, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the rendering device by adopting a control that prevents the counter value of the operation pulse from being reset by the detection of the position detection sensor. become.

  Each position detection sensor of the present embodiment is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, although detailed illustration is omitted, and the sensor detection unit provided in each rendering device starts shielding the light receiving unit. When it is done (in the case of so-called rising edge detection), it is determined that the effect member (sensor detection unit) is detected by the position detection sensor. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor indicates the drive amount of the movable effect member on which the operation pattern is executed, and is data for grasping the current position of the effect member in software. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is stored in the position information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 as position information for grasping the current position of the effect member. In actual operation of the production member, there may be a deviation from the positional information of the production member managed in software by the CPU for production control based on uncertain factors such as the step-out of the drive motor. is there. Therefore, the position information of the effect member managed in software is corrected at the timing at which the position of the effect member can be physically specified, that is, at the timing detected by each position detection sensor. Accordingly, it is possible to perform accurate operation control of the movable effect device, and it is possible to prevent problems such as a failure due to contact with other effect members. The counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor may be added or subtracted in the interrupt process in which the operation pulse is output depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor. For example, “+1” is counted (added) when the drive motor is rotating forward, and “−1” is counted (subtracted) when the drive motor is rotating backward. In addition, for example, “+1” (or “−1”), “+2” (or “−2”) and an addition amount (depending on the excitation method of the drive motor (one-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation, two phase excitation)) The subtraction amount may be different. In this way, the drive motor drive pattern data includes step switching between two-phase excitation and half-phase excitation such as 1-2-phase excitation and one-phase excitation. With respect to a movable production device that may operate, it is possible to grasp the position information of the production member from the counter value of the operation pulse.

  Here, a first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 106 schematically shows the relationship between counter values of operation pulses when an initial position sensor, an intermediate position sensor, and a movable position sensor are provided. In the present embodiment, the upper support unit drive motor 505 of the upper rendering device 500 provided with the upper initial position sensor 516a, the upper intermediate position sensor 516b, and the upper movable position sensor 516c, the initial rotation position sensor 533a, and the intermediate rotation position sensor 533b. This setting example can be applied to the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect device 500 provided with the rotationally movable position sensor 553c. In the following description, the rotation direction of the drive motor that moves the effect member from the initial position toward the movable position is defined as the forward rotation direction.

In FIG. 106, SP1 is the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper. SP2 is a counter value of an operation pulse of the drive motor (corresponding to a displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during the reverse rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the initial position) step number). SP3 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit ends the light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to when the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor starts to shield during the forward rotation of the drive motor. It is a counter value (number of steps). SP4 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor during the forward rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the intermediate position. (Number of steps). SP5 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor during the reverse rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the intermediate position ( step number). SP6 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit ends the light shielding of the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor to when the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor starts to shield during the forward rotation of the drive motor. It is a counter value (number of steps). SP7 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor during the forward rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP8 is a counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the movable position) by the mechanical stopper.

  The drive motor operation pulse counter value (number of steps) corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position is the initial value when the effect member is located at the initial position. Set to a different value. The counter value of the operation pulse when correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of light shielding of the sensor) is also set to a different value between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, zero value or dummy data) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position is set to SP2 + SP3. At the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, a counter value of SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value of SP2. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the intermediate position is set to a counter value of SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the drive pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data that becomes SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7).

  As described above, the reason why different correction values (of the counter value of the operation pulse) are set at the start of detection by the same position detection sensor between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive motor is the correction of the position information of the effect member. The timing at which the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state (timing at which the end of the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the position detection sensor) can be easily acquired as input information. It is mentioned that it is a member with a physical width. Even if the position information of the effect member is corrected at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the detection state to the non-detection state, the processing is the same. However, since the effect member moves to the initial position (or intermediate position, movable position) and then moves until the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor is not shielded, the initial position (or It may be difficult to determine whether or not it is located at an intermediate position or a movable position. Therefore, it can be said that the present embodiment in which the position information of the effect member is corrected at the timing when the position detection sensor switches from the non-detection state to the detection state is more preferable. Further, in the present embodiment, after detecting that the effect member has moved to the initial position or the movable position by the position detection sensor, in order to cope with the physical movement of the effect member to the initial position or the movable position, As the counter value of the operation pulse, the counter values SP2 and SP7 of the operation pulse from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor and the movable position sensor until the effect member reaches the initial position and the movable position. In addition, counter values SP1 and SP8 of operation pulses until the effect member comes into contact with the mechanical stopper are set. Thereby, the position control of the effect member can be stabilized, and although it is a more preferable embodiment, it is possible not to set the counter values SP1 and SP8 of the operation pulse until the effect member comes into contact with the mechanical stopper portion. It is.

Next, a second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 107 schematically shows a relationship between counter values of operation pulses when an initial position sensor and a movable position sensor are provided. In the present embodiment, this setting example can be applied to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 of the upper rendering device 500 provided with the proximity initial position sensor 558a and the separation movable position sensor 558c. The lower left rear side drive motor 603 of the lower left side rendering device 600 provided with the lower left back side initial position sensor 605a and the lower left back side movable position sensor 605c, and the lower left side production device provided with the left standing initial position sensor 636a and the left tilt movable position sensor 636c. This setting example can be applied to the lower left front drive motor 637 of 600. Upper left rear side drive motor 703 of the upper left side rendering device 700 provided with the upper left rear side initial position sensor 705a and the upper left rear side movable position sensor 705c, and an upper left side stage effect provided with an upper initial position sensor (not shown) and a lower movable position sensor 736c. This setting example can be applied to the upper left front drive motor 737 of the apparatus 700.

  The lower right back side drive motor 803 of the right side rendering device 800 provided with the lower right back side initial position sensor 805a and the lower right side back side movable position sensor 805c, and the right side rendering device provided with the upper right back side initial position sensor 810a and the upper right back side movable position sensor 810c. This setting example can be applied to the lower right front drive motor 867 of the right effect device 800 in which the upper right rear drive motor 808 of 800, the right standing initial position sensor 866a, and the right tilt movable position sensor 866c are provided. . The lower support device drive motor 904 of the lower rendering device 900 provided with the lower initial position sensor 908a and the lower movable position sensor 908c, and the lower side provided with the first back side initial position sensor 936a and the first back side movable position sensor 936c. This setting example is applied to the front side drive motor 967 of the lower side production device 900 provided with the back side rotation drive motor 934 of the production device 900 and the first front side initial position sensor 969a and the first front side movable position sensor 969c. Can do.

  In FIG. 107, SP11 is the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper portion. SP12 is a counter value of an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during the reverse rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the initial position ( step number). SP13 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit ends the light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to when the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor starts to shield during the forward rotation of the drive motor. It is a counter value (number of steps). SP14 is a counter value of an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to a displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor during the forward rotation of the drive motor to when the effect member reaches the movable position. (Number of steps). SP15 is a counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the movable position) by the mechanical stopper portion.

  The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position and the movable position is set to a different value at the time of forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor, with the initial value when the effect member is located at the initial position. Is done. The counter value of the operation pulse when correcting the position information of the effect member at the start of detection of each position detection sensor (at the start of light shielding of the sensor) is also set to a different value between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive motor. For example, at the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value (for example, zero value or dummy data) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is set to SP12 + SP13. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value of SP12. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined set value (for example, a counter value or dummy data of SP12 + SP13 + SP14) is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position.

Returning to FIG. 100, after executing the sensor input check process (S731), the first accessory control process is executed (S732). In the first accessory control process (S732), the upper effect device 5
When the operation of the 00 first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 (first upper effect member 571) is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the upper support portion drive motor 505 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper support drive motor 505 is configured to be able to execute operations according to, for example, four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 (A) to 110 (D). Note that the four types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 110A to 110D are selected according to the contents of the operation requests to the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. In the operation tables shown in FIGS. 110A to 110D, “+” of the “operation” item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal rotation direction, and (−) of the “operation” item is Indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the reverse direction.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110A is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position (hereinafter, the upper movable position operation table for convenience). And is composed of first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8. By the first to eighth processing tables TA1 to TA8, the upper support drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position (constant speed state (first 1 to third processing tables TA1 to TA3), and when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper movable position sensor 516c, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are moved. Control is performed so as to perform the operation of decelerating, holding the excitation, and stopping (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TA4 to TA8) at the upper movable position.

  In the first to second processing tables TA1 to TA2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TA4 to TA6 in the operation table for the upper movable position, once every X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated by the number of “steps” in each table (outputs an operation pulse), the process of moving to the next processing table is performed. For example, in the case of the first processing table TA1, the “frequency” is 250 [pps (pulses per second)] and the interruption cycle of the production control side timer interruption processing is 1 in the case of the first processing table TA1. Since [ms] (1000 interruptions per second), one operation pulse is output every four interruptions (one step update, one excitation phase update). In the third processing table TA3 in the operation table for the upper movable position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is sent once every X times (two times) according to the “frequency (500 [pps])”. When the update is performed and the upper movable position sensor 516c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. Note that “number of steps (N)” in the third processing table TA3 indicates an indefinite number of steps.

  As described above, the operation table for the upper movable position includes a processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support units 521 and 531. Includes a processing table that terminates the processing when it moves to the detection position of the upper movable position sensor 516c. The number of times the drive data is updated in accordance with the “number of steps” in each table is counted as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the corresponding drive motor (upper support portion drive motor 505).

110B is an operation table for moving the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper rendering device 500 from the upper initial position to the upper intermediate position (hereinafter, the upper intermediate position operation table for convenience). And is composed of first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7. By means of the first to seventh processing tables TB1 to TB7, the upper support drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position toward the upper intermediate position (constant speed state (first 1 to third processing tables TB1 to TB3), and when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper intermediate position sensor 516b, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are moved. Control is performed to perform the operation of decelerating and holding the excitation, and stopping at the upper intermediate position (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TB4 to TB7).

  In the operation table for the upper intermediate position, in the first to second processing tables TB1 to TB2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TB4 to TB5, once every X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” in each table, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TB3 in the operation table for the upper intermediate position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is obtained once every X times (two times) according to the “frequency (500 [pps])”. When the upper intermediate position sensor 516b is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the upper intermediate position operation table includes the processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper support units 521 and 531. Includes a processing table that terminates the processing when it moves to the detection position of the upper middle position sensor 516b.

  Note that, in the sixth processing table TB6, like the other processing tables (for example, the seventh processing table TA7 in the operation table for the upper movable position), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 by the inertial force are used. Unlike the drive pattern in which the upper support drive motor 505 performs the excitation holding operation of 100 [ms] in order to completely stop the operation, the upper support drive motor is set to a maximum of 10 [s] for maintaining the excitation hold. 505 performs an excitation holding operation. This is because when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper intermediate position, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are not subjected to the holding force by the mechanical stopper portion or the like and are against gravity. It is for holding. The reason why the time for maintaining the excitation holding is set to 10 [s] at the maximum is that the time to be maintained differs according to the variation effect pattern.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110C is an operation table for returning the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper rendering device 500 to the upper initial position (hereinafter, referred to as an upper initial position operation table for convenience). And is composed of first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8. By the first to eighth processing tables TC1 to TC8, the upper support drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper movable position (or the upper intermediate position) to the upper initial position. When the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, and the first and second upper processing portions TC1 to TC3 are brought into a constant speed state. Control is performed so as to perform the operation of decelerating and holding the support portions 521 and 531 and stopping at the upper initial position (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TC4 to TC8).

  In the operation table for the upper initial position, in the first to second processing tables TC1 to TC2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TC4 to TC6, once every X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated by the number of “steps” in each table, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TC3 in the operation table for the upper initial position, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is obtained once every X times (four times) according to the “frequency (250 [pps])”. When the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the upper initial position operation table includes a processing table that is terminated when an operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper supports 521 and 531. Includes a processing table that terminates the processing when it moves to the detection position of the upper initial position sensor 516a.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 110D is an operation table for reciprocating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 between the upper initial position and the vicinity of the upper intermediate position (hereinafter, for convenience, The operation table may be referred to as a reciprocating operation table), and includes first to twenty-second processing tables TD1 to TD22. By means of the first to sixth processing tables TD1 to TD6, the upper support drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supports 521 and 531 from the upper initial position to the upper movable position and is in a constant speed state (first 1 to the third processing table TD1 to TD3), when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a and passes through the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and first processing tables Control is performed so as to perform the operation of decelerating and maintaining excitation (corresponding to the fourth to sixth processing tables TD4 to TD6) by decelerating the two upper support portions 521 and 531.

  Subsequently, according to the seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD14, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supporters 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position to be in a constant speed state. The operation of decelerating and holding the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 (corresponding to the seventh to tenth processing tables TD7 to TD10) and the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 in the upper movable position The first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated and excited and held (corresponding to the 11th to 14th processing tables TD11 to TD14). It is controlled to repeat the number of times. Then, by the fifteenth to twenty-second processing tables TC15 to TC22, the upper support driving motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper supporters 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position (constant speed state (fifteenth to fifteenth)). 17 corresponding to the seventeenth processing tables TD15 to TD17), when the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support portion 521 is detected by the upper initial position sensor 516a, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are decelerated. The motor is controlled to perform the operation of holding the excitation and stopping at the upper initial position (corresponding to the 18th to 22nd processing tables TD18 to TD22).

  First to second processing tables TD1 to TD2, fourth to fifth processing tables TD4 to TD5, seventh to ninth processing tables TD7 to TD9, and first to thirteenth processing in the reciprocating operation table. The tables TD11 to TD13, the 15th to 16th processing tables TD15 to TD16, and the 18th to 20th processing tables TD18 to TD20 are supported once for X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table. When the drive data of the unit drive motor 505 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” in each table, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TD3 in the reciprocating operation table, the drive data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated once every X times (three times) according to the “frequency (333 [pps])”. Then, when the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the detection state to the non-detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. Since the upper initial position sensor 516a is in the detection state at the start of the reciprocating operation, the processing table (TD3) for controlling with an indefinite number of steps is terminated at the timing when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches to the non-detection state, By shifting to the processing table (TD4) that controls the number of steps, the amount of motion up to the effect operation position can be stabilized. In the 17th processing table TD17 in the reciprocating operation table, the driving data of the upper support drive motor 505 is updated once every X times (four times) according to the “frequency (250 [pps])”. Then, when the upper initial position sensor 516a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the reciprocating operation table includes the processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper support drive motor 505 by a predetermined number of steps, and the first and second upper supports 521 and 531. It includes a processing table that ends processing when it moves to the detection position (or non-detection position) of the upper initial position sensor 516a.

In the seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD14 of the reciprocating operation table, the upper support drive motor 505 accelerates the first and second upper support units 521 and 531 toward the upper initial position, and determines them. An operation of decelerating and holding the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 in a speed state, and accelerating the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 toward the upper movable position to a constant speed state; The operation of decelerating and holding the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 is repeatedly performed a set number of times with the following changes (seventh to fourteenth processing tables TD7 to TD7). The TD may be controlled to loop a set number of times). Here, the eighth processing table TD8 is a processing table that performs control with an indefinite number of steps, and when the upper initial position sensor 516a switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the processing shifts to the next processing table (TD9). Change to do. Accordingly, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 reliably return to the upper initial position in the reciprocating operation, so that the first and second upper support portions 521 and 521 are caused by the action of gravity even in repeated reciprocating operations. It is possible to prevent the 531 from being lowered too much and causing a sense of incongruity such as a shift in the center position of the reciprocating motions of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531. In addition, when the reciprocating operation is repeated a predetermined number of times, the control is not limited to the control for ending the reciprocating operation. You may make it perform control which complete | finishes.

  Next, the second accessory control process is executed (S733). In the second accessory control process (S733), when requesting the operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500, a process of updating the drive data of the upper effect part drive motor 538 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is configured to be able to execute operations in accordance with, for example, two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. Note that the two types of operation tables shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B are selected according to the content of the operation request for the second upper effect member 581. In the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, (+) of the “operation” item indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the normal rotation direction, and (−) of the “operation” item is Indicates that the rotation direction of the drive motor is the reverse direction.

  The operation table shown in FIG. 111A is an operation table for moving the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the proximity initial position to the separation movable position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an operation table for the separation movable position for convenience). ) And is composed of first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7. By the first to seventh processing tables TE1 to TE7, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper rendering member 581 from the proximity initial position to the separation movable position (constant speed state (first to third). When the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper effect member 581 is detected by the separation movable position sensor 558c, the second upper effect member 581 is decelerated and excited and held, and the separation movable position is obtained. Is controlled to perform an operation of stopping (corresponding to the fourth to seventh processing tables TE4 to TE7).

  In the first to second processing tables TE1 to TE2 and the fourth to fifth processing tables TE4 to TE5 in the operation table for the separation movable position, once every X interrupts according to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the number of “steps” in each table, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TE3 in the operation table for the separation movable position, the driving data of the upper effect section drive motor 538 is obtained once every X times (two times) according to the “frequency (500 [pps])”. When the separation movable position sensor 558c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of shifting to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the separation movable position-oriented operation table includes the processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 by a predetermined number of steps, and the second upper rendering member 581 is the separation movable position sensor. And a processing table that ends the processing when it moves to the detection position 558c.

The motion table shown in FIG. 111 (B) is a motion table for returning the second upper rendering member 581 of the upper rendering device 500 to the proximity initial position (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a proximity initial position motion table for convenience). 1 to 8 processing tables TF1 to TF8.
By means of the first to eighth processing tables TF1 to TF8, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 accelerates the second upper rendering member 581 from the separation movable position toward the proximity initial position, and is in a constant speed state (first to third When the sensor detection unit 589 of the second upper stage production member 581 is detected by the proximity initial position sensor 558a, the second upper stage production member 581 is decelerated and excited and held, and the proximity initial position is obtained. Is controlled to perform an operation of stopping (corresponding to the fourth to eighth processing tables TF4 to TF8).

  In the first to second processing tables TF1 to TF2 and the fourth to sixth processing tables TF4 to TF6 in the operation table for the proximity initial position, once every X interrupts corresponding to the “frequency” of each table, When the drive data of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is updated and the drive data is updated as many times as the “number of steps” in each table, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. In the third processing table TF3 in the operation table for the proximity initial position, the drive data of the upper effect section drive motor 538 is obtained once every X times (three times) interrupts corresponding to the “frequency (333 [pps])”. When the update is performed and the proximity initial position sensor 558a is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, a process of moving to the next processing table is performed. As described above, the operation table for the proximity initial position includes the processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted by the predetermined number of steps to the upper rendering unit drive motor 538, and the second upper rendering member 581 is the proximity initial position sensor. And a processing table that ends the processing when it moves to the detection position 558a.

  In the second accessory control process (S733), even when the operation of the second upper effect member 581 is requested, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 move to the upper movable position. If not, skip the process. And if the 1st and 2nd upper side support parts 521 and 531 move to an upper movable position, the process which updates the drive data of the upper stage production | presentation part drive motor 538 will be started. For example, in the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, when the upper movable position sensor 516c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state, the process of the first processing table TE1 in the separation movable position operation table is started. To do.

  As described above, in the operation table for the upper movable position shown in FIG. 110A, the upper support unit drive motor 505 of the upper rendering device 500 is configured such that the sensor detection unit 524 of the first upper support unit 521 is the upper movable position sensor 516c. Is detected, the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are controlled to be decelerated, held excited, and stopped at the upper movable position. Thus, even after the upper movable position sensor 516c is switched from the non-detection state to the detection state and the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 starts operating, the upper support unit drive motor 505 is in a state of operating for a certain period. In the present embodiment, the “frequency” of the first to second processing tables TE1 to TE2 is set to a relatively small value in the operation table for separation movable position shown in FIG. As a result, the rotational speed of the upper stage production unit drive motor 538 immediately after the start of operation is reduced and the current consumption is suppressed. Therefore, in the electrical limit determination process (S745) described later, the upper side production unit drive motor 505 and the upper stage production unit are driven. The possibility that the total value of the current consumption of the drive motor including the motor 538 exceeds a predetermined regulated current value can be reduced. As described above, even when the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 starts operating when the upper movable position sensor 516c switches from the non-detection state to the detection state, the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 operates smoothly. It is possible to make it.

Next, a third accessory control process is executed (S734). In the third accessory control process (S734), when the operation of the sub display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the display device drive motor 534 is performed. The drive pattern data of the display device drive motor 534 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 110A to 110D, for example, and is the same as in the case of the first accessory control process (S732). Can be processed. In the third accessory control process (S734), even when the operation of the sub display device 561 is requested, the process is skipped if the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is not moved to the separation movable position. To do. And if the 2nd upper direction production member 581 moves to a separation movable position, the process which updates the drive data of the display apparatus drive motor 534 will be started. When the sub display device 561 is rotated by the display device drive motor 534 in a state where the second upper effect member 581 is not moved to the separation movable position, the second upper effect member 581 is placed on the rotation trajectory of the edge of the sub display device 561. This is because the effect member 581 is positioned and interferes. The operation requests for the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531, the second upper effect member 581, and the display device drive motor 534 of the upper effect device 500 are collectively transmitted according to the changing effect pattern, and the first to third In the accessory control process (S732 to S734), each drive motor is driven based on detection information or error information of a position detection sensor (of another effect member different from the effect member to be controlled) of the upper effect device 500. Timing is controlled.

  Next, the fourth accessory control process is executed (S735). In the fourth accessory control process (S735), when requesting the operation of the upper left front side production member 761 of the upper left side production device 700, the process of updating the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper left front drive motor 737 is configured to be able to execute, for example, the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to (B), and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. In the fourth accessory control process (S735), even when an operation toward the lower movable position of the upper left front side production member 761 is requested, the lower left front side production member 661 of the lower left side production device 600 moves to the left tilt movable position. If not, the process is skipped in order to prevent the upper left front side production member 761 from interfering with the lower left front side production member 661. Then, when the lower left front side production member 661 moves to the left side tilt movable position, the process of updating the drive data of the upper left front side drive motor 737 is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the upper left front side production member 761 from coming into contact with the lower left front side production member 661.

  Next, the fifth accessory control process is executed (S736). In the fifth accessory control process (S736), when requesting the operation of the upper left rear side production member 721 of the upper left side production device 700, a process of updating the drive data of the upper left rear side drive motor 703 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper left rear drive motor 703 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. Note that the upper left back side production member 721 does not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the upper left back side movable position or the upper left back side initial position, so that interference is avoided based on the position information of the other production members. This process is not skipped. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, a sixth accessory control process is executed (S737). In the sixth accessory control process (S737), when requesting the operation of the lower left front side production member 661 of the lower left side production device 600, a process of updating the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower left front drive motor 637 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733) Can be processed. In the sixth accessory control process (S737), even when an operation toward the left standing initial position of the lower left front side production member 661 is requested, the upper left front side production member 761 of the upper left side production device 700 is at the upper initial position. When not moving, the processing is skipped in order to prevent the lower left front side production member 661 from interfering with the upper left front side production member 761. Then, when the upper left front side production member 761 moves to the upper initial position, the process of updating the drive data of the lower left front side drive motor 637 is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lower left front side production member 661 from coming into contact with the upper left front side production member 761.

Next, a seventh accessory control process is executed (S738). In the seventh accessory control process (S738), when the operation of the lower left back side effect member 621 of the lower left side effect device 600 is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the lower left back side drive motor 603 is performed. Lower left back drive motor 6
The drive pattern data 03 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and performs the same process as in the second accessory control process (S733). be able to. Note that the lower left back side production member 621 does not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the lower left back side movable position or the lower left back side initial position, so that interference is avoided based on the position information of the other production members. This process is not skipped. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, an eighth accessory control process is executed (S739). In the eighth accessory control process (S739), when the operation of the upper right rear side production member 851 of the right side production device 800 is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the upper right rear side drive motor 808 is performed. The drive pattern data of the upper right rear drive motor 808 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. Note that the upper right back side production member 851 does not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the upper right back side movable position or the upper right back side initial position, so that interference is avoided based on the position information of the other production members. This process is not skipped. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, the ninth accessory control process is executed (S740). In the ninth accessory control process (S740), when requesting the operation of the lower right rear side production member 831 of the right side production device 800, a process of updating the drive data of the lower right rear side drive motor 803 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower right back side drive motor 803 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Similar processing can be performed. In addition, since the lower right back side production member 831 does not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the lower right back side movable position or the lower right back side initial position, interference based on the position information of the other production members. Processing skip for avoidance is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, the tenth accessory control process is executed (S741). In the tenth accessory control process (S741), when the operation of the lower right front side production member 891 of the right side production device 800 is requested, a process of updating the drive data of the lower right front side drive motor 867 is performed. The drive pattern data of the lower right front drive motor 867 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and in the case of the second accessory control process (S733). Similar processing can be performed. In addition, since the lower right front side production member 891 does not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the right tilting movable position or the right side standing initial position, interference avoidance based on the position information of the other production members is avoided. Processing skipping for is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, an eleventh accessory control process is executed (S742). In the eleventh accessory control process (S742), when the operations of the first and second front movable support portions 951 and 961 and the first and second back movable support portions 921 and 931 of the lower rendering device 900 are requested. In addition, a process for updating the drive data of the movable support portion drive motor 904 is performed. For example, the drive pattern data of the movable support unit drive motor 904 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. Similar processing can be performed. The first and second front side movable support portions 951 and 961 and the first and second back side movable support portions 921 and 931 have other effects during the operation toward the lower movable position or the lower initial position. Since there is no interference with the member, the skip of the process for avoiding the interference based on the position information of the other effect members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

Next, a twelfth accessory control process is executed (S743). This twelfth accessory control process (S7
43), when requesting the operation of the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 of the lower side production device 900, processing for updating the drive data of the front side drive motor 967 is performed. The drive pattern data of the front drive motor 967 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to (B), for example, and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733). Processing can be performed. The first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 do not interfere with other effect members when operating toward the first and second front side movable positions or the first and second front side initial positions. The skip of the process for avoiding interference based on the position information of the other effect members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Next, the thirteenth accessory control process is executed (S744). In the thirteenth accessory control process (S744), when requesting the operation of the first and second back side production members 941, 946 of the lower side production device 900, a process of updating the drive data of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is performed. Do. The drive pattern data of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is configured to be able to execute the same operation as the operation table shown in FIGS. 111A to 111B, for example, and is the same as in the second accessory control process (S733). Can be processed. The first and second back side production members 941 and 946 do not interfere with other production members during the operation toward the first and second back side movable positions or the first and second back side initial positions. The skip of the process for avoiding interference based on the position information of the other effect members is not performed. However, skipping of the process for improving the appearance of the rendering operation is appropriately performed.

  Further, in the 11th to 13th accessory control processes (S742 to S744), the process can be skipped based on the position information of other effect members. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIGS. 60 to 62, when the lower effect device 900 performs an effect operation, in the eleventh accessory control process (S742), the first and second front movable support portions 951 and 961 Even when requesting an operation toward the lower movable position of the first and second backside movable support portions 921, 931, if other production members that may interfere with each other have not moved to the initial position, the production Processing can be skipped to avoid interference with the member. In the twelfth accessory control process (S743), the first and second front-side movable support portions are requested even when the first and second front-side effect members 971 and 981 are requested to move toward the first and second front-side movable positions. When 951 and 961 and the first and second backside movable support portions 921 and 931 are not moved to the lower movable position, the processing can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the rendering operation. In the thirteenth accessory control process (S744), the first and second front side effect members 971 are requested even when the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 are requested to move toward the first and second back side movable positions. , 981 have not moved to the first and second front side movable positions, the processing can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the rendering operation.

  Further, for example, when the lower effect device 900 performs the initial position return operation opposite to the effect operation described above, in the twelfth accessory control process (S743), the first of the first and second front effect members 971, 981 is performed. Even when requesting an operation toward the second front side initial position, if the first and second back side rendering members 941 and 946 have not moved to the first and second back side initial positions, the appearance of the initial position return operation is improved. To improve, it is possible to skip the process. In the eleventh accessory control process (S742), when requesting an operation toward the lower initial position of the first and second front movable support portions 951 and 961 and the first and second back movable support portions 921 and 931 However, when the first and second front side production members 971 and 981 are not moved to the first and second front side initial positions, the processing can be skipped in order to improve the appearance of the initial position return operation.

Next, an electrical restriction determination process is executed (S745). In this electrical restriction determination process (S745), in the above-described first to thirteenth accessory control processes (S732) to (S734), the current consumption of the drive motor to which the operation pulse output is set in the current interrupt process is set. It is determined whether the total value exceeds a predetermined regulated current value. In the present embodiment, there is a drive pattern in which a plurality of some of the effect members among the plurality of effect members of each effect device are moved simultaneously.

  The table in FIG. 113 shows an example of a simultaneous drive pattern in which a plurality of drive motors of each effect device can simultaneously move corresponding effect members. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 113, there are first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. The circles in the table of FIG. 113 indicate drive motors that operate in the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns. For example, the first simultaneous drive pattern includes an upper left back drive motor 703 of the upper left rendering device 700, a lower left back drive motor 603 of the lower left rendering device 600, an upper right back drive motor 808 and a lower right back side of the right rendering device 800. The simultaneous drive pattern in which the drive motor 803 operates is shown. The second simultaneous drive pattern includes an upper support unit drive motor 505 and an upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, and an upper left rear drive motor of the upper left effect device 700. 703 and the simultaneous drive pattern which the lower left back side drive motor 603 of the lower left side production | presentation apparatus 600 operate | moves are shown. Further, for example, the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern includes an upper support unit drive motor 505 and an upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, a movable support unit drive motor 904, a front drive motor 967 of the lower effect device 900, and The simultaneous drive pattern which the back side rotational drive motor 934 operates is shown.

  The table in FIG. 112 shows the relationship between the current consumption value of the drive motor and the regulated current value in each rendering device. The power source shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicates the power source of each drive motor. Upper support unit drive motor 505, upper display unit drive motor 538, and display device drive motor 534 of upper presentation device 500 operate using power supplied from first 12V power source G1 provided on power supply board 450. To do. The upper left front drive motor 737 and the upper left back drive motor 703 of the upper left rendering device 700 are also operated using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The lower left front drive motor 637 and the lower left back drive motor 603 of the lower left rendering device 600 also operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The upper right back side drive motor 808, the lower right back side drive motor 803, and the lower right front side drive motor 867 of the right effect device 800 also operate using the electric power supplied from the first 12V power supply G1. The movable support unit drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 of the lower rendering device 900 operate using the power supplied from the second 12V power supply G <b> 2 provided on the power supply board 450. .

  The priorities shown in the table of FIG. 112 indicate priorities when operating each drive motor. For example, as shown in the table of FIG. 112, the priority order is the order of the drive motors corresponding to the first to thirteenth accessory control processes (S732) to (S734) (upper support drive motor 505, upper effect). Part drive motor 538, display device drive motor 534, upper left front drive motor 737, upper left back drive motor 703, lower left front drive motor 637, lower left back drive motor 603, upper right back drive motor 808, lower right back drive motor 803, lower right The front side drive motor 867, the movable support portion drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotary drive motor 934 can be set in this order.

In the table of FIG. 112, the consumption current value of the upper support unit drive motor 505 of the upper rendering device 500 is H1, the consumption current value of the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 is H2, and the consumption current value of the display device drive motor 534 is H3. And The current consumption value of the upper left front drive motor 737 of the upper left rendering device 700 is H4, and the current consumption value of the upper left rear drive motor 703 is H5. The current consumption value of the lower left front drive motor 637 of the lower left rendering device 600 is H6, and the current consumption value of the lower left back drive motor 603 is H7. The current consumption value of the upper right rear drive motor 808 of the right effect device 800 is H8, the current consumption value of the lower right rear drive motor 803 is H9, and the current consumption value of the lower right front drive motor 867 is H10. The current consumption value of the movable support unit drive motor 904 of the lower side rendering device 900 is H11, the current consumption value of the front side drive motor 967 is H12, and the current consumption value of the back side rotation drive motor 934 is H13. Current consumption value H1 of each drive motor
-H13 is about 0.4 [A] to 1.8 [A].

  The regulated current value is set for each power source of each drive motor. In the example shown in the table of FIG. 112, a drive motor (upper support drive motor 505, upper rendering drive motor 538, display drive motor 534, upper left front drive motor 737, upper left rear side, which uses the first 12V power supply G1 as a power source. A first regulated current value HL1 for the drive motor 703, the lower left front drive motor 637, the lower left back drive motor 603, the upper right back drive motor 808, the lower right back drive motor 803, and the lower right front drive motor 867); A second regulated current value HL2 is set for the drive motors (movable support drive motor 904, front side drive motor 967, and back side rotary drive motor 934) that use 12V power supply G2 as a power source. In the present embodiment, in addition to the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, the total regulated current value HLA for all the drive motors is set. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 are set to 5.0 [A], for example. The total regulated current value HLA is set to 6.0 [A], for example. The first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2 may be set to different current values. Further, the total regulated current value HLA is larger than the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2, and is smaller than the current value obtained by adding the first regulated current value HL1 and the second regulated current value HL2. It may be set.

  112 and 113, for example, as in the twelfth simultaneous drive pattern, the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper effect unit drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, and the lower effect device 900 Processing when the movable support portion drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 are simultaneously driven will be described. In this case, it is determined whether or not the total current consumption of the upper support unit drive motor 505 and the upper rendering unit drive motor 538 for which the operation pulse output is set in the current interrupt process exceeds the first regulated current value HL1. To do. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the first regulation current value HL1, the drive motor having the highest priority order among the upper support part drive motor 505 and the upper effect part drive motor 538 within a range not exceeding the first regulation current value HL1. Sets the operation pulse output for. Then, the output information of the operation pulses of the other drive motors with lower priority is stored in the save buffer, and the next interrupt process reads out from the save buffer and sets the priority.

  Whether the total current consumption of the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the back rotary drive motor 934 for which the operation pulse output is set in the current interrupt processing exceeds the second regulated current value HL2 Determine whether or not. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the second regulation current value HL2, the movable support portion drive motor 904, the front side drive motor 967, and the back side rotation drive motor 934 have priority within a range not exceeding the second regulation current value HL2. Set the operation pulse output of the drive motor with the highest priority. Then, the output information of the operation pulses of the other drive motors with lower priority is stored in the save buffer, and the next interrupt process reads out from the save buffer and sets the priority.

  Further, the current consumption of the upper support drive motor 505, the upper rendering drive motor 538, the movable support drive motor 904, the front drive motor 967, and the back rotary drive motor 934, for which the operation pulse output is set in the current interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not the total value exceeds the total regulated current value HLA. When the total value of the current consumption exceeds the total regulation current value HLA, the upper support section drive motor 505, the upper performance section drive motor 538, the movable support section drive motor 904, and the front side drive are within a range not exceeding the total regulation current value HLA. Of the motor 967 and the back side rotational drive motor 934, the output of the operation pulse of the drive motor with the highest priority is set. Then, the output information of the operation pulses of the other drive motors with lower priority is stored in the save buffer, and the next interrupt process reads out from the save buffer and sets the priority.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the total value of the current consumption of the drive motor from becoming too large and the operation of the drive motor to become unstable, so that the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized. In the case of other simultaneous drive patterns among the first to thirteenth simultaneous drive patterns, the first regulated current value HL1, the second regulated current value HL2, and the total regulated current value HLA are determined, and the same. It is possible to perform the process. In addition, when the output information of the operation pulse of the drive motor with the low priority is stored in the save buffer, the operation of the rendering device with the low priority can be performed by performing the process of setting with priority in the next interrupt process. It is possible to prevent the production device from being irregularly operated to the extent that it is not executed by continuous interruption processing and is perceived by the player.

  Then, an error determination process is executed (S746) after the electrical restriction determination process (S745). In this error determination process (S746), a step number over error determination process, a position check error determination process, and a time monitoring check error determination process are performed. In the determination process of the step number over error, the position detection sensor does not detect that the effect member of each effect device is located at the initial position, the movable position, or the intermediate position, and the counter value (step of the operation pulse of the drive motor (step Number) exceeds the error determination value. When the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor exceeds the error determination value, it is determined that the step number over error. As described above, the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position, the intermediate position, and the movable position is the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position. As described above, the driving motor is reset to a different value at the time of forward rotation and reverse rotation. As a result, the reference position for counting the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error determination value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the step number over error, and to stabilize the operation of the rendering device. Each of the operation tables shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 includes a processing table having an indefinite number of steps until the position detection sensor switches to the detection state. When the production member stops operating due to a mechanical trouble), the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor is updated without switching from the processing table having an indefinite number of steps. Therefore, the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor can be used as the determination value for the abnormal operation, and there is no need to provide a separate counter for measuring the time for determining the timeout. If there is a possibility of using an operation table that does not include a processing table with an indefinite number of steps, the operation of the effect member ends even if an abnormal state occurs. It is preferable to provide a timer (time counter) for monitoring on / off.

  In the case of the first setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 108, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the six error determination sections K1 to K6. The first error determination section K1 is a section from the intermediate position during forward rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The second error determination section K2 is a section from the initial position when the drive motor is rotating forward until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor. The third error determination section K3 is a section from the initial position when the drive motor rotates forward until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The fourth error determination section K4 is a section from the intermediate position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor. The fifth error determination section K5 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the intermediate position sensor. The sixth error determination section K6 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor.

  Error determination values ES1 to ES6 corresponding to the first to sixth error determination sections K1 to K6 are expressed by the following equations (1) to (6). Note that the coefficient α in the following equations (1) to (6) is set to a numerical value (for example, 1.2) corresponding to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES1 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + (SP5 + SP6) × α (1)
ES2 = (SP2 + SP3) × α (2)
ES3 = (SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6) × α (3)
ES4 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4- (SP3 + SP4) × α (4)
ES5 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
− (SP6 + SP7) × α (5)
ES6 = SP2 + SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7
− (SP3 + SP4 + SP5 + SP6 + SP7) × α (6)

  In the case of the second setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, as shown in FIG. 109, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the two error determination sections K11 to K12. The seventh error determination section K11 is a section from the initial position when the drive motor rotates forward until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the movable position sensor. The eighth error determination section K12 is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor.

  Error determination values ES12 to ES12 corresponding to the seventh to eighth error determination sections K11 to K12 are represented by the following expressions (7) to (8). In addition, the coefficient α1 in the following formulas (7) to (8) is set to a numerical value (for example, 1.2) corresponding to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES11 = (SP12 + SP13) × α1 (7)
ES12 = SP12 + SP13 + SP14
− (SP13 + SP14) × α1 (8)

  The coefficient α in the expressions (1) to (6) and the coefficient α1 in the expressions (7) to (8) may be set to different values as appropriate according to the configuration of the effect member that the drive motor moves. Further, the coefficient α in the equations (1) to (6) and the coefficient α1 in the equations (7) to (8) are, for example, when the effect member moves in the vertical direction, Different numerical values may be set depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor.

  In the position check error determination process, it is determined whether or not the effect member of each effect device is located at the initial position at the timing of the game. Note that the timing of a game milestone is the timing of a waiting-for-customer demonstration, the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the timing of the start of variation of the decorative symbol, the timing of the end of variation of the decorative symbol That is. If the effect member of each effect device is not located at the initial position at the timing of the game milestone, it is determined as a position check error. In the determination process of the time monitoring check error, when the effect member is positioned at the initial position for control (when an operation request is not made), the state of the position detection sensor corresponding to the effect member is set to a predetermined monitoring time (for example, 5 seconds) It is determined whether or not it is in a non-detection state. When the position detection sensor is in a non-detection state for a predetermined monitoring time or more, it is determined as a time monitoring check error.

[Error recovery processing, etc.]
In the error determination process (S746) described above, if it is determined that the number of steps exceeds an error, a position check error, or a time monitoring check error, an error recovery process corresponding to each error is executed. In the present embodiment, the error recovery process and the process are made common in the initialization operation process at the time of power-on related to the rendering device. Therefore, an initialization operation process at the time of power-on related to the rendering device and an error return process corresponding to each error will be described.

<Initialization process at power-on>
First, the initialization operation process at the time of power-on related to the rendering device will be briefly described. FIG. 101A is a flowchart showing an overview of initialization operation processing at power-on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on, an initial position return process is executed (S751). In this initial position return process, control is performed to return the effect members of each effect device (upper effect device 500, lower left effect device 600, upper left effect device 700, right effect device 800, and lower effect device 900) to the initial position. Do. Details of the initial position return processing (S751) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Then, after executing the initial position return process (S751), the accessory initialization process is executed (S752). In this accessory initialization process, control is performed to move the effect member of each effect device within the maximum movable range (range between the initial position and the movable position). Details of the accessory initialization process (S752) will be described later with reference to FIG. If the initialization operation process at power-on fails 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, all the drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and a process for shifting to a state in which an operation pattern request is not accepted is performed. At the same time, image display by the effect display device 95, sound notification by the speaker 8, and external notification that the effect device is abnormal are performed by turning on the effect lamp LP.

《Error recovery process when step number over error》
Next, an error recovery process at the time of step number over error will be briefly described. FIG. 101B is a flowchart showing an outline of error recovery processing when the number of steps exceeds an error. If it is determined in the error determination process (S746) that the step number over error, an initial position return process is executed (S756). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power-on.

  Then, after performing the initial position return process (S756), the accessory initialization process is executed (S757). This accessory initialization process is performed when the power is turned on except that the effect member of the effect device determined to have an error in the number of steps is moved within the maximum movable range (the range between the initial position and the movable position). This is the same process as the accessory initialization process (S752) executed in the initialization operation process. In addition, when the error recovery process at the time of step number over error fails continuously several times (for example, 3 times), it is determined as a motor error, all the drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and an operation pattern request is made. A process for shifting to a state of not accepting is performed. However, before the request is not accepted, the drive motor is controlled so as to move the effect member (determined as the step number over error) toward the initial position regardless of the detection state of the position detection sensor. For example, the effect member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 becomes small, and the effect member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 and hinder the visibility. An operation request for a fixed step operation (not an operation using a position detection sensor) is made to the motor. Thereby, when the step number over error occurs, the visibility of the effect display device 95 can be prevented from being hindered by the effect member.

Of the operations directed to the initial position of the effect member, the operations directed to the movable position of the effect member, or the operations directed to the intermediate position of the effect member as the operation request for the fixed step operation for the drive motor, the effect display device 95. You may make it perform the operation | movement request | requirement toward the position which does not disturb the visibility of most. Such an operation request for a fixed-step operation is one of a plurality of effect members when an operation request is made for an effect member that is not completed even if error recovery processing is repeated, or when a plurality of effect members are in an abnormal situation. In order to complete the error return processing for the effect member, a mode in which an operation request is made for another effect member is conceivable. In addition, since the number of steps over error may be an abnormality during the game, the abnormality notification to the outside should be made more conservative than the abnormality notification performed during the initialization operation process at power-on. It is desirable to ensure the visibility of variation effects.

《Error recovery process at position check error》
Next, error return processing at the time of a position check error will be briefly described. FIG. 101C is a flowchart showing an outline of error return processing at the time of a position check error. If it is determined in the error determination process (S746) that a position check error has occurred, an initial position return process is executed (S761). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power-on. In addition, when error return processing at the time of a position check error has failed 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, and all drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and a process of shifting to a state in which an operation pattern request is not accepted is performed. Then, an external notification that the effect device is abnormal is performed by displaying an image by the effect display device 95, sound notification by the speaker 8, and lighting of the effect lamp LP.

《Error recovery process at time monitoring check error》
Next, an error recovery process when a time monitoring check error occurs will be briefly described. FIG. 101D is a flowchart illustrating an overview of error recovery processing when a time monitoring check error occurs. If it is determined in the error determination process (S746) that a time monitoring check error has occurred, an initial position return process is executed (S766). This initial position return process is the same process as the initial position return process (S751) executed in the initialization operation process at power-on. In addition, when the error recovery process at the time of the time monitoring check error has failed 10 times, it is determined as a motor error, and all the drive motors in each rendering device are stopped, and a process of shifting to a state in which an operation pattern request is not accepted is performed. At the same time, image display by the effect display device 95, sound notification by the speaker 8, and external notification that the effect device is abnormal are performed by turning on the effect lamp LP.

(Initial position return processing)
Next, the initial position return process (S751) will be described. 102 to 104 are flowcharts showing details of the initial position return processing (S751).

  First, all combination stop processing is executed (S771). In the all combination stop process (S771), a stop request is made to the drive motor related to all the combination operations, that is, control for temporarily stopping all the effect members in each effect device.

  Next, an upper left front side production member feedback process is executed (S772). In this upper left front side production member feedback process (S772), control is performed to return the upper left front side production member 761 of the upper left side production device 700 to the upper initial position. When the upper left front side production member 761 is already positioned at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, a lower left front side production member feedback process is executed (S773). In this lower left front side production member feedback process (S773), control is performed to return the lower left front side production member 661 of the lower left side production device 600 to the left standing initial position. When the lower left front side production member 661 is already positioned at the left side standing initial position, this processing is skipped.

Next, front / back side effect member feedback processing is executed (S774). In the front / back side effect member feedback processing (S774), control is performed to return the first and second front side effect members 971, 981 of the lower effect device 900 to the first and second front side initial positions. When the first and second front side effect members 971 and 981 are already positioned at the first and second front side initial positions, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 of the lower effect device 900 to the first and second back side initial positions. When the first and second back side effect members 941 and 946 are already positioned at the first and second back side initial positions, this process is skipped.

  Next, the movable support returning process is executed (S775). In this movable support part feedback processing (S775), control is performed to return the first and second backside movable support parts 921, 931 and the like of the lower rendering device 900 to the lower initial position. When the first and second backside movable support portions 921, 931 and the like are already located at the lower initial position, this process is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lower right front side production member 891 of the right side production device 800 is located at the right side standing initial position (S776). In the first determination process (S776), when the lower right front side production member 891 is not located at the right side standing initial position (S776: NO), the first and second upper support portions 521, 531 of the upper side production device 500. Is positioned at the upper initial position, the second upper rendering member 581 is positioned at the proximity initial position, and it is determined whether the sub display device 561 is positioned at the rotation initial position (S777). In the second determination process (S777), the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial position, the second upper effect member 581 is located at the close initial position, and the sub display device 561 is If it is located at the initial rotation position (S777: YES), the process proceeds to the lower right front side production member feedback process (S781).

  On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531, the second upper effect member 581, and the sub display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S 777: NO), the sub display device The process proceeds to operation processing (S778). In the sub display device operation process (S778), control is performed to rotate the sub display device 561 toward the rotation initial position by the fixed step operation.

  Next, a second upper effect member return process is executed (S779). In the second upper effect member feedback process (S779), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the proximity initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already positioned at the initial proximity position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the upper support part feedback process is executed (S780), and the process proceeds to the lower right front side effect member feedback process (S781). In the upper support part feedback processing (S780), control is performed to return the first and second upper support parts 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial position. When the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already positioned at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

  In the lower right front side production member return process (S781), control is performed to return the lower right front side production member 891 of the right side production device 800 to the right standing initial position. When the lower right front side production member 891 is already positioned at the right side standing initial position, this processing is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are located at the upper initial position and the sub display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782). In the first determination process (S776), when the lower right front side production member 891 is located at the right standing initial position (S776: YES), the above-described second determination process (S777), sub display device The third determination process (S782) is skipped from the operation process (S778), the second upper effect member feedback process (S779), the upper support part feedback process (S780), and the lower right front effect member feedback process (S781). Migrate to In the third determination process (S782), when the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are located at the upper initial position and the sub display device 561 is located at the rotation initial position (S782: YES), The process proceeds to (second) second upper stage production member feedback processing (S789).

On the other hand, when at least one of the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 and the sub display device 561 is not located at the initial position (S782: NO), the second upper effect member movable process (S783) is performed. Transition. In the second upper effect member moving process (S783), control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separation movable position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already located at the separation movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, a second upper effect member holding process is executed (S784). In the second upper effect member holding process (S784), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separation movable position, the second upper effect member 581 (by the upper effect part drive motor 538). Control to perform excitation holding operation.

  Next, an upper support part operation process is executed (S785). In this upper support part operation process (S785), when the first and second upper support parts 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 are located at the upper movable position, the first and second upper support parts 521 and 531 ( Control is performed to perform a pushing operation (in a direction beyond the upper movable position). When the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are not positioned at the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the upper support portion moving process is executed (S786). In the upper support portion movable process (S786), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. When the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already positioned at the upper movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the secondary display device moving process is executed (S787). In this sub display device movable process (S787), control is performed to rotate the sub display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 to the rotationally movable position. When the sub display device 561 is already positioned at the rotationally movable position, this process is skipped.

  Next, the secondary display device feedback process is executed (S788), and the process proceeds to the (second) second upper effect member feedback process (S789). In the secondary display device feedback process (S788), control is performed to return the secondary display device 561 of the upper rendering device 500 to the initial rotation position. If the sub display device 561 is already at the initial rotation position, this process is skipped.

  In the (second) second upper effect member feedback processing (S789), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the proximity initial position. If the second upper effect member 581 is already positioned at the initial proximity position, this process is skipped.

  Next, a (second) second upper effect member holding process is executed (S790). In this (second) second upper effect member holding process (S790), when the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 is located at the separation movable position, the (upper effect part of the second upper effect member 581). Control is performed to perform an excitation holding operation (by the drive motor 538).

  Next, a (second) upper support portion feedback process is executed (S791). In this (second) upper support portion feedback process (S791), control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper initial position. When the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are already positioned at the upper initial position, this process is skipped.

Then, back side effect member feedback processing is executed (S792). In this back side effect member feedback processing (S792), control is performed to return the upper left back side effect member 721 of the upper left effect device 700 to the upper left back side initial position. When the upper left rear side production member 721 is already positioned at the upper left rear side initial position, this process is skipped. Further, control is performed to return the lower left back side production member 621 of the lower left side production device 600 to the initial position of the lower left back side. If the lower left rear side production member 621 is already positioned at the lower left rear side initial position, this process is skipped. In addition, control is performed to return the upper right back side movable member 841 of the right effect device 800 to the upper right back side initial position. If the upper right rear movable member 841 is already positioned at the upper right rear initial position, this process is skipped. Also, control is performed to return the lower right back side effect member 831 of the right effect device 800 to the lower right back side initial position. If the lower right rear side production member 831 is already positioned at the lower right lower side initial position, this process is skipped.

(Function initialization process)
Next, the accessory initialization process (S752) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing details of the accessory initialization process (S752).

  First, a back side production member initialization operation process is executed (S801). In this back side production member initialization operation process (S801), control is performed to move the upper left back side production member 721 of the upper left side production device 700 within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper left back side initial position and the upper left back side movable position). Further, control is performed to move the lower left rear side production member 621 of the lower left side production device 600 within the maximum movable range (a range between the lower left rear side initial position and the lower left rear side movable position). Also, control is performed to move the upper right backside movable member 841 of the right effect device 800 within the maximum movable range (a range between the upper right back side initial position and the upper right back side movable position). Further, control is performed to move the lower right back side production member 831 of the right side production device 800 within the maximum movable range (a range between the lower right back side initial position and the lower right back side movable position).

  Next, a lower right front side production member initialization operation process is executed (S802). In this lower right front side production member initialization operation process (S802), control for moving the lower right front side production member 891 of the right side production device 800 within the maximum movable range (the range between the right standing initial position and the right tilt movable position). I do.

  Next, an upper left front side production member initialization operation process is executed (S803). In the upper left front effect member initialization operation process (S803), there is a possibility that the upper left front effect member 761 of the upper left effect device 700 may interfere with the lower left front effect member 661 of the lower left effect device 600 during the confirmation operation. First, the lower left front side production member 661 is swung and displaced to the left side tilt movable position, and then the upper left front side production member 761 is moved within the maximum movable range (the range between the upper initial position and the lower movable position). I do.

  Next, a lower left front side production member feedback process is executed (S804). In this lower left front side production member feedback process (S804), control is performed to return the lower left front side production member 661 of the lower left side production device 600 from the left tilt movable position to the left standing initial position. Since the lower left front side production member 661 is oscillating and displaced to the left tilt movable position in the previous upper left front side production member initialization operation processing (S803), the maximum movable range (the left standing initial position and the left tilt movable position Only the operation to return to the left standing initial position is performed. By performing the upper left front side production member initializing operation process (S803) and the lower left front side production member returning process (S804), it becomes a process replacing the initialization operation process of the lower left front side production member 661.

  Next, an upper effect member moving process is executed (S805). In the upper effect member moving process (S805), control is performed to move the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 to the upper movable position. In addition, control is performed to move the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 to the separation movable position.

  Next, the secondary display device initialization operation process is executed (S806). In the sub display device initialization operation process (S806), control is performed to perform the excitation holding operation of the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500. Further, the sub display device 561 of the upper effect device 500 is rotated between the rotation initial position and the rotation movable position, and is controlled to return to the rotation initial position.

  Next, an upper effect member feedback process is executed (S807). In the upper effect member feedback process (S807), control is performed to return the second upper effect member 581 of the upper effect device 500 from the separation movable position to the proximity initial position. In addition, control is performed to return the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 of the upper effect device 500 from the upper movable position to the upper initial position.

  Subsequently, a movable support part movable process is performed (S808). In the movable support unit movable process (S808), control is performed to move the first and second backside movable support units 921, 931 and the like of the lower rendering device 900 to the lower movable position.

  Next, front / back side production member initialization operation processing is executed (S809). In the front / back side production member initialization operation processing (S809), the excitation holding operation (by the movable support portion drive motor 904) of the first and second back side movable support portions 921, 931 moved to the lower movable position is performed. Control. Further, the control for moving the first and second front side production members 971 and 981 of the lower side production device 900 within the maximum movable range (the range between the first and second front side initial positions and the first and second front side movable positions). I do. Further, the control for moving the first and second back side production members 941 and 946 of the lower side production device 900 within the maximum movable range (a range between the first and second back side initial positions and the first and second back side movable positions). I do.

  And a movable support part return process is performed (S810). In this movable support part feedback process (S810), control is performed to return the first and second backside movable support parts 921, 931 and the like of the lower rendering device 900 from the lower movable position to the lower initial position. Since the first and second backside movable support portions 921, 931 and the like have moved to the lower movable position in the previous movable support portion movable process (S808), the maximum movable range (lower initial position and lower movable position) Only the operation for returning to the lower initial position is performed. By executing the movable support part movable process (S808) and the movable support part feedback process (S810), the process replaces the initialization operation process of the first and second backside movable support parts 921, 931 and the like.

[Characteristic configuration in this embodiment]
[Characteristic configuration of upper rendering device]
In the present embodiment, when the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the proximity initial position by the upper effect part drive motor 538 of the upper effect device 500, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member when viewed from the front. If the front of the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 is covered by 581 and the second upper effect member 581 is moved to the separation movable position by the upper effect part drive motor 538, the first upper effect member 571 and the second The screen 561a of the sub display device 561 is visible from the front through the gap with the upper effect member 581. Thereby, the sub display device 561 appears from behind the first upper side production member 571 and the second upper side production member 581 and a predetermined production image is displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561. Can be performed.

  Further, the secondary display device 561 is rotated along the plane including the screen 561a in a state where the second upper rendering member 581 is moved to the separation movable position by the upper rendering section drive motor 538 and the like on the second upper support section 531. A display drive motor 534 and the like are provided. Thereby, the sub display device 561 appears from the rear of the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581, and the sub display device 561 is rotated by the display device driving motor 534 or the like, which is surprising. A variety of performances can be performed.

In addition, the second upper stage production member 581 is moved to the initial proximity position by the upper stage production unit drive motor 538 or the like, and the second upper stage production member 581 is moved from the proximity initial position to the separation movable position by the upper stage production unit drive motor 538 or the like. An upper base portion 501 that movably supports the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 is provided between the upper effect position and the upper effect position. And
As the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 move relative to the upper base portion 501, the first upper effect member 571 can be displaced in a direction away from the second upper effect member 581. Accordingly, the first upper effect member 571 and the second upper effect member 581 supported by the first and second upper support portions 521 and 531 are integrated in a state of being close to each other between the upper initial position and the upper intermediate position. Or can be moved away from each other between the upper middle position and the upper performance position, and various effects can be performed.

[Characteristic configuration of the lower left rendering device and the upper left rendering device]
In the present embodiment, the lower left stage production device 600 includes a left standing initial position where the lower left front stage production member 661 extends in the vertical direction, and a left tilt movable position where the lower left front stage production member 661 tilts to the left from the left standing initial position. In addition, a lower left front drive motor 637 for displacing the lower left front production member 661 and the like are provided, and the upper left production device 700 has the upper left front production member 761 positioned in the vicinity of the upper part of the lower left front production member 661 at the left standing initial position. An upper left front drive motor 737 for moving the upper left front effect member 761 is provided at an upper initial position extending in the vertical direction and a lower movable position below the upper initial position. The upper left front drive motor 737 and the like move the upper left front effect member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front drive member 661 is displaced to the left tilt movable position by the lower left front drive motor 637 and the like. When the upper left front side production member 761 is moved to the lower movable position by the upper left front side drive motor 737 or the like, the upper left side production member 761 is configured to be positioned near the upper part of the lower left front side production member 661 displaced to the left side tilt movable position.

  Accordingly, when the upper left front side production member 761 moves from the upper initial position to the lower movable position, the upper left front side production member 761 is positioned near the upper part of the lower left front side production member 661 displaced from the left standing initial position to the left side tilt movable position. For this reason, if an integrated effect member extending in the vertical direction is formed by the upper left front effect member 761 at the upper initial position and the lower left front effect member 661 at the left standing initial position, the upper left front effect member 761 is formed. And the lower left front side production member 661 can produce an effect such that an integrated production member collapses, and a variety of unexpected productions can be performed. The upper left front drive motor 737 and the like move the upper left front effect member 761 to the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower left front drive member 661 is displaced to the left tilt movable position by the lower left front drive motor 637 and the like. It is possible. Therefore, the upper left front effect member 761 can be prevented from coming into contact with the lower left front effect member 661, and the lower left effect device 600 and the upper left effect device 700 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  Also, the upper left front drive motor 737 and the like are configured to move the upper left front effect member 761 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting leftward. In this way, by making the movement of the upper left front side production member 761 complicated, various productions can be performed.

[Characteristic configuration of lower rendering device]
In the present embodiment, the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 of the lower rendering device 900 are engaged with the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 provided on the left and right sides of the first back side movable support portion 921. The first backside movable support portion 921 and the like are moved in the vertical direction with respect to the lower base portion 901 by the movable support portion drive motor 904 and the like. Accordingly, the left biasing spring is configured to swing in the vertical direction, and applies a biasing force to the left and right sides of the lower base portion 901 in the direction in which the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 swing upward. 913 and a right biasing spring 918 are provided. In this way, even if the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect member 946 are rotated by the left arm member 911 and the right arm member 916 connected to the left and right of the first back side movable support portion 921, The horizontal displacement of the first backside movable support portion 921 and the like due to vibration and the like is suppressed. Therefore, the rack gear portion 924 of the first back side movable support portion 921 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction and coming off from the pinion gear 906 of the movable support portion drive mechanism 905 of the lower base portion 901. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a failure of the lower rendering device 900.

  Further, when the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like move to the lower side movable position, the left engagement pin 926 of the first back side movable support portion 921 moves to the end portion on the front end side of the left engagement hole 912 in the left arm member 911. The right engagement pin 927 comes into contact with the end portion on the distal end side of the right engagement hole 917 in the right arm member 916. Then, since the left engagement pin 926 and the right engagement pin 927 are more difficult to move, the first back side effect member 941 and the second back side effect are obtained with the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like moved to the lower side movable position. Even if the member 946 rotates, the displacement of the first backside movable support portion 921 and the like in the left-right direction is effectively suppressed. Further, the first back side movable support portion 921 and the like are prevented from moving upward beyond the lower side movable position and coming off the lower base portion 901. For this reason, it is possible to more reliably prevent a failure of the lower rendering device 900.

[Characteristic configuration of electrical restriction determination process]
In the present embodiment, two or more drive motors out of a plurality of drive motors (drive sources) of each effect device are consumption of the two or more drive motors in an effect mode in which the effect device performs an effect operation. When the total current value exceeds a predetermined regulated current value, the operation timings of the two or more drive motors are controlled so that the total consumed current value is equal to or less than the regulated current value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total value of the current consumption of the drive motor from becoming too large and the operation of the drive motor to become unstable, so that the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized.

[Characteristic configuration of error judgment processing]
In the present embodiment, when the effect member moves to the detection position (initial position, intermediate position, and detection position at the movable position) of the position detection sensor by the drive motor (stepping motor), the effect member is positioned at the initial position. Is set as an initial value, and the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the detected position is set as the position information of the effect member (stored in the position information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260). Configured. As a result, the reference position for counting the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor is unified at the initial position, so that the error determination value of the step number over error can be accurately obtained. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the step number over error, and to stabilize the operation of the rendering device.

[Characteristic configuration of error recovery processing]
In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the step number over error has occurred in the error determination process (S746) described above, an error recovery process is executed when the step number over error occurs, and the error recovery process is performed a plurality of times (for example, three times). ) If it fails continuously, the drive motor (drive means) is controlled to move the effect member toward the initial position. For example, the effect member is moved toward a position where the area overlapping the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 becomes small, and the effect member is driven so as not to overlap the front of the screen 95a of the effect display device 95 and hinder the visibility. An operation request for a fixed step operation (not an operation using a position detection sensor) is made to the motor. Thereby, when the step number over error occurs, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect display device 95 from being hindered by the effect member.

[Characteristic configuration of operation table]
In the present embodiment, the drive motor (stepping motor) is controlled based on an operation table including a plurality of process tables, and the plurality of process tables are processed when an operation pulse is transmitted to the drive motor a predetermined number of times. And a processing table in which the processing ends when the effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, the detection position of the movable position sensor). Since the effect member can be reliably moved to the movable position or the like by the processing table that ends the processing when the effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, the effect members can be moved smoothly without contacting them. And the operation of the rendering device can be stabilized.

  For example, a first drive motor (stepping motor) that moves the first effect member is controlled based on a first operation table including a plurality of process tables, and the plurality of process tables are provided to the first drive motor a predetermined number of times. A processing table that ends when the operation pulse is transmitted, and a processing table that ends when the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor (for example, the detection position of the movable position sensor), When the first effect member moves to the detection position of the position detection sensor, control of the second drive motor (stepping motor) for moving the second effect member is started based on the second operation table including a plurality of processing tables. As a result, the first effect member can be reliably moved to the movable position or the like, so that the first and second effect members can be smoothly moved without contact, and the operation of the effect device can be stabilized. It becomes possible to make it.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, a liquid crystal shutter or a light guide plate is provided on the rear surface side of the first light emitting effect unit 572 in the first upper effect member 571 and on the rear surface side of the second light effect effect unit 582 in the second upper effect member 581. You may do it. By temporarily operating the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate, the visibility behind the first light emitting effect unit 572 and the second light emitting effect unit 582 (with respect to the screen 561a of the sub display device 561) is hindered. During this time, the effect image displayed on the screen 561a of the sub display device 561 can be changed without being visually recognized by the player. If the operation of the liquid crystal shutter or the light guide plate is stopped, it is possible to perform an effect of suddenly changing the light emission color or the like of the first light emission effect unit 572 and the second light emission effect unit 582.

  In the above-described embodiment, when it is in a situation where the display operation of the secondary display device 561 cannot be performed due to an error in the number of steps, information that is scheduled to be displayed on the screen 561a of the secondary display device 561 is displayed on the screen 95a of the display display device 95. May be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the upper right front side production member 898 is fixed side by side above the lower right front side production member 891 of the right side production device 800, but is not limited thereto. For example, in the right effect device 800, the upper right front effect member 898 is positioned near the upper part of the right lower standing effect member 891 at the initial position of the right standing and extends in the vertical direction, and the lower position below the upper initial position. An upper right front drive motor that moves the upper right front effect member 898 in the vertical direction may be provided at the movable position. In this case, the upper right front side drive motor or the like has the upper right front side production member 898 in the upper initial position and the lower movable position in a state where the lower right front side production member 891 is displaced to the right side tilt movable position by the lower right front side drive motor 867 or the like. When the upper right front side production member 898 is moved to the lower movable position by the upper right front side drive motor or the like, the upper right side production member 891 is positioned near the upper side of the lower right front side production member 891 displaced to the right side tilt movable position. Is done. Further, in this case, the upper right front drive motor and the like are configured to move the upper right front effect member 898 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while inclining rightward (or leftward). Thereby, the same effect as the case of lower left side production apparatus 600 and left upper side production apparatus 700 can be acquired.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper left front drive motor 737 and the like of the upper left rendering device 700 are configured to move the upper left front rendering member 761 extending in the vertical direction from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while tilting leftward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper left front side production member 761 extending in the vertical direction may be configured to move from the upper initial position to the lower movable position while being inclined rightward. The right guide hole 735 of the base portion 731 may have a wave shape, and the upper left front side production member 761 may be moved while being shaken.

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Therefore, a third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 114 schematically shows the relationship between counter values of operation pulses when the effect member reciprocates and only the initial position sensor is provided (for example, an effect member that freely falls until it comes into contact with the mechanical stopper). Show. In FIG. 114, SP21 is a counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the initial position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the initial position) by the mechanical stopper portion. SP22 is a counter value of an operation pulse of the drive motor (corresponding to a displacement amount from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to the initial position when the drive motor rotates in the reverse direction). step number). SP23 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit finishes shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to the movable position during normal rotation of the drive motor. (Number of steps). SP24 is a counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the displacement amount from the movable position to the limit position (in the direction beyond the movable position) by the mechanical stopper portion.

  The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position, and the forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor. Set to a different value. For example, at the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, a predetermined initial value is set as the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position. At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to a counter value of SP22. Note that the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the movable position is not set because the movable position sensor is not provided.

  In the case of the third setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the ninth error determination section. The ninth error determination section is a section from the movable position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor. The error determination value ES21 corresponding to the ninth error determination section is expressed by the following equation (9). The coefficient α2 in the following equation (9) is set to a numerical value (for example, 1.2) corresponding to the assembly error of each effect device.

  ES21 = SP22 + SP23− (SP23) × α2 (9)

  Next, a fourth setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor will be described. FIG. 115 schematically shows a relationship between counter values of operation pulses when the effect member performs continuous rotational movement (such as a rotating reel) and only the initial position sensor is provided. In FIG. 115, SP31 is an operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor to the initial position when the drive motor reverses. Counter value (number of steps). SP32 is a counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the amount of displacement from when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor during the forward rotation of the drive motor until the effect member reaches the initial position. (Number of steps). SP33 corresponds to the amount of displacement after the sensor detection unit ends the light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor (by one rotation) until the light shielding of the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor starts again during the forward rotation of the drive motor. This is the counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor.

  The counter value (number of steps) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is the initial value (for example, zero value) when the effect member is located at the initial position, and the forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor. Set to a different value. For example, at the time of forward rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (step number) of the operation pulse of the drive motor corresponding to the initial position is set to (−SP32). At the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor, the counter value (number of steps) of the drive motor operation pulse corresponding to the initial position is set to (+ SP31).

  In the case of the fourth setting example of the counter value of the operation pulse of the drive motor, the error determination value of the step number over error can be set for the tenth to eleventh error determination sections. The tenth error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of forward rotation of the drive motor until the sensor detection unit starts shielding the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). The eleventh error determination section is a section from the initial position at the time of reverse rotation of the drive motor to when the sensor detection unit starts to shield the light receiving unit of the initial position sensor again (by one rotation). Error determination values ES31 to ES32 corresponding to the tenth to eleventh error determination sections are expressed by the following equations (10) to (11). Note that the coefficient α3 in the following equations (10) to (11) is set to a numerical value (for example, 1.2) corresponding to the assembly error of each effect device.

ES31 = (SP31 + SP33) × α3 (10)
ES32 = − (SP32 + SP33) × α3 (11)

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been illustrated and described as an example of the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The same effect can be obtained by applying the same to a game machine (slot machine).

PM Pachinko machine PA Game area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 50 Game board 90 Center decoration 95 Production display device (95a screen)
100 Main control board 200 Production control board 500 Upper production apparatus 501 Upper base part 505 Upper support part drive motor 506 Upper support part drive mechanism 516a Upper initial position sensor 516b Upper intermediate position sensor 516c Upper movable position sensor 521 First upper support part 531 Second upper support portion 533a Initial rotation position sensor 533b Intermediate rotation position sensor 534 Display device drive motor 535 Rotation drive mechanism 538 Upper effect portion drive motor 539 Upper effect portion drive gear 551 Cover light emitting portion 553c Rotation movable position sensor 558a Proximity initial position sensor 558c Separate movable position sensor 561 Sub-display device (561a screen)
571 1st upper side production member 572 1st light emission production | generation part 581 2nd upper side production member 582 2nd light emission production | generation part 600 Lower left side production apparatus 601 Left lower back side base part 603 Left lower back side drive motor 604 Left lower back side drive gear 605a Left lower back side initial position sensor 605c Lower left rear movable position sensor 621 Left lower rear side production member 631 Lower left front base part 636a Left standing initial position sensor 636c Left tilt movable position sensor 637 Left lower front drive motor 638 Left lower front drive mechanism 661 Left lower front production member 700 Left upper production apparatus 701 Upper left rear base portion 703 Upper left rear drive motor 705a Upper left rear side initial position sensor 705c Upper left rear movable position sensor 721 Upper left rear side production member 731 Upper left front base portion 736c Lower movable position sensor 737 Upper left front drive motor 738 Upper left front drive mechanism 7 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Upper left front side production member 800 Right side production device 801 Right back side base part 803 Right bottom back side drive motor 804 Right bottom back side drive mechanism 805a Right bottom back side initial position sensor 805c Bottom right back side movable position sensor 808 Right top back side drive motor 809 Right top back side drive gear 810a Upper right rear side initial position sensor 810c Upper right rear side movable position sensor 831 Lower right rear side production member 851 Upper right side rear production member 861 Right front side base part 866a Right side standing initial position sensor 866c Right side tilt movable position sensor 867 Right lower front side drive motor 868 Right lower Front side drive mechanism 891 Lower right front side production member 900 Lower side production device 901 Lower side base part 904 Movable support part drive motor 905 Movable support part drive mechanism 908a Lower initial position sensor 908c Lower movable position sensor 911 Left arm member 912 Left engagement Joint hole 913 Left bias spring 16 Right arm member 917 Right engagement hole 918 Right biasing spring 921 First backside movable support portion 926 Left engagement pin 927 Right engagement pin 931 Second backside movable support portion 934 Backside rotation drive motor 935 Backside rotation drive mechanism 936a First 1 back side initial position sensor 936c 1st back side movable position sensor 941 1st back side production member 946 2nd back side production member 951 1st front side movable support part 961 2nd front side movable support part 967 front side drive motor 968 front side drive mechanism 969a 1st front side Initial position sensor 969c First front side movable position sensor 971 First front side production member 981 Second front side production member

Claims (3)

An image display device having a screen capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A support portion that supports the image display device so that the screen faces forward;
A first effect member that is supported by the support portion and disposed in front of the screen, and capable of transmitting light emitted from the screen;
A second effect member that is supported by the support portion and arranged on a placement surface parallel to the screen passing through the first effect member so as to be movable along the placement surface, and capable of transmitting light emitted from the screen; With
The support portion places the second effect member on the arrangement surface at a proximity position where the second effect member is close to the first effect member and a separation position where the second effect member is separated from the first effect member. There is a production member moving means for moving along
When the second effect member moves to the proximity position by the effect member moving means, the front of the screen is covered by the first effect member and the second effect member when viewed from the front,
When the second effect member is moved to the separation position by the effect member moving means, the screen can be visually recognized from the front through a gap between the first effect member and the second effect member. Game machine directing device.   The support portion includes a rotating unit that rotates the image display device along a plane including the screen in a state where the second effect member is moved to the separation position by the effect member moving unit. The game machine rendering device according to claim 1. A base portion that supports the support portion in a relatively movable manner;
The said 1st effect member can be displaced to the direction which leaves | separates from the said 2nd effect member as the said support part moves relatively with respect to the said base part, The Claim 1 or 2 characterized by the above-mentioned. Game machine directing device.

Images